Toyota OM47828U

User Manual: Toyota 2013 Toyota Prius V Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 411 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1QUICK GUIDE 9
2BASIC FUNCTION 25
3NAVIGATION SYSTEM 54
4
PHONE
129
5AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 188
6VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 267
7INFORMATION 281
8
APPS
303
9PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM 316
INDEX 377
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Introduction
This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this
manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all
times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation sys-
tem differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the
map data available at the time of producing this document.
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle ac-
cessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using
these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present po-
sition and assists in locating a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present
starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you
to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses
DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traf-
fic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times
be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow
you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination
is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection
close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio in-
structions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when
approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your
eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneu-
ver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limita-
tions that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehi-
cle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle
condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the
system, refer to pages 126 through 128.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention
with the following marks.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
CAUTION
●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk
of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
●This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equip-
ment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in
order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
4
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
No. Name Description
Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.
Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.
Information Useful information for the user is described.
5
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown
below.
This system is intended to assist in reach-
ing the destination and, if used properly,
can do so. The driver is solely responsible
for the safe operation of your vehicle and
the safety of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to
the extent it becomes a distraction and
prevents safe driving. The first priority
while driving should always be the safe op-
eration of the vehicle. While driving, be
sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly famil-
iar with it. Read the entire Navigation Sys-
tem Owner’s Manual to make sure you
understand the system. Do not allow other
people to use this system until they have
read and understood the instructions in
this manual.
For your safety, some functions may be-
come inoperable when driving. Unavail-
able screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the
destination and route selection be done.
While driving, listen to the voice instruc-
tions as much as possible and glance at
the screen briefly and only when it is safe.
However, do not totally rely on voice guid-
ance. Use it just for reference. If the sys-
tem cannot determine the current position
correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect,
late, or non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally
be incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-
sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such
things as the safety of an area, condition of
streets, and availability of emergency ser-
vices. If unsure about the safety of an ar-
ea, do not drive into it. Under no
circumstances is this system a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it
is legal to do so. Some states/provinces
may have laws prohibiting the use of video
and navigation screens next to the driver.
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
CAUTION
●For safety, the driver should not operate
the navigation system while he/she is
driving. Insufficient attention to the road
and traffic may cause an accident.
●While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on
the road has been changed, route guid-
ance may not have the updated informa-
tion such as the direction of a one way
street.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION ............ 10
OVERVIEW BUTTON AND
GUIDANCE SCREEN ......................... 10
REGISTERING HOME .......................... 12
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS.................................. 14
OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE ....................... 16
SETTING HOME AS
THE DESTINATION ............................ 17
2. FUNCTION INDEX........................... 18
NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
INDEX ................................................. 18
3. QUICK REFERENCE....................... 20
“Destination” SCREEN........................... 20
“Setup” SCREEN ................................... 22
“Information” SCREEN........................... 24
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION .................................. 26
INITIAL SCREEN................................... 26
TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............ 27
INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/
LIST SCREEN OPERATION............... 28
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT....................... 31
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................. 33
2. SETUP ............................................. 43
GENERAL SETTINGS........................... 43
VOICE SETTINGS................................. 52
1. DESTINATION SEARCH ................ 56
DESTINATION SEARCH ....................... 56
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE............ 74
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ........................ 78
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN............... 78
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS ........................................... 81
DISTANCE AND TIME
TO DESTINATION............................... 84
SETTING AND DELETING
DESTINATIONS .................................. 85
SETTING ROUTE .................................. 87
3. ADDRESS BOOK ........................... 96
NAVIGATION SETTINGS ...................... 96
4. SETUP........................................... 112
DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS......................................... 112
VEHICLE SETTINGS ........................... 120
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM) ..................................... 126
LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM ............................................ 126
1QUICK GUIDE
2BASIC FUNCTION
3NAVIGATION SYSTEM
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. PHONE OPERATION .................... 130
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 130
PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ................ 132
REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE....... 137
CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 141
RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 148
TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 149
Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION........................................ 152
2. SETUP ........................................... 155
PHONE SETTINGS............................. 155
Bluetooth® SETTINGS ........................ 177
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATION ................................ 190
QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 190
SOME BASICS.................................... 192
RADIO OPERATION ........................... 199
HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
INFORMATION ................................. 202
RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite
Radio BROADCAST) ........................ 206
RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET
RADIO BROADCAST) ...................... 212
DVD PLAYER OPERATION................ 213
USB MEMORY OPERATION.............. 233
iPod OPERATION ............................... 238
Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION......... 242
AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS
(STEERING SWITCHES) ................. 252
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS ......................... 254
2. SETUP ........................................... 264
AUDIO SETTINGS .............................. 264
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION................................ 268
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .............. 268
NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION
(ENGLISH ONLY) ............................. 274
EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS....... 276
COMMAND LIST ................................. 277
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY............. 282
FUEL CONSUMPTION........................ 282
MAP DATABASE VERSION AND
COVERAGE AREA ........................... 283
2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW ......... 285
XM SERVICES .................................... 285
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ....... 286
XM Sports ............................................ 286
XM Stocks............................................ 289
XM Fuel Prices..................................... 292
XM NavWeather™ ............................... 295
XM NavTraffic®.................................... 298
4. SETUP........................................... 301
XM SETTINGS..................................... 301
4PHONE
5AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
6VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
7INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW .................... 304
ENTUNE SERVICE ............................. 304
BEFORE USING ENTUNE .................. 306
2. ENTUNE OPERATION .................. 308
ACTIVATING “APPS” .......................... 308
LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION
LOCAL FUNCTION ........................... 311
INPUTTING KEYWORD
OPERATION ..................................... 313
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM ....................................... 318
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 318
2. ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM................... 322
INTRODUCTION ................................. 322
MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING ..... 324
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 330
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE................................................ 344
WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ......... 355
MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
MODE................................................ 360
USAGE PRECAUTIONS ..................... 366
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ................... 378
8APPS
9PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM
INDEX
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND
GUIDANCE SCREEN................... 10
2. REGISTERING HOME ................... 12
3. REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS ........................... 14
4. OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE................. 16
5. SETTING HOME AS THE
DESTINATION ............................. 17
1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
INDEX........................................... 18
1. “Destination” SCREEN................. 20
2. “Setup” SCREEN .......................... 22
3. “Information” SCREEN................. 24
1NAVIGATION OPERATION
2FUNCTION INDEX
3QUICK REFERENCE
QUICK GUIDE
10
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND GUIDANCE SCREEN
No. Name Function Page
North-up or
heading-up sym-
bol
This symbol indicates whether the map orienta-
tion is set to north-up or heading-up. Touching
this symbol changes the map orientation. Both
north-up and heading-up symbols display the ve-
hicles direction as a letter (e.g. N for north).
41
Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 41
“SETUP” button Press to display the “Setup” screen.
22, 31, 43,
52, 96, 112,
120, 155,
177, 264,
301
“INFO/APPS”
(“INFO”) button
Press to display the “Information” screen.
For vehicles sold in Canada, the “INFO” button is
used instead of the “INFO/APPS” button.
24, 282,
283, 286,
289, 292,
295, 298,
308, 311
*
11
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
*: Press and hold the “PWR VOL” knob for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restart the
navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremely slow.
Zoom out button Touch to reduce the map scale. 41
“ Off”
Touch to obtain a broader view. Some of the but-
tons on the screen will not be displayed. They are
displayed again by touching “On ”.
116
“Mark” Touch to register the current position or the cur-
sor position as an address book entry. 34
“Route” Touch to change the route. 85, 87
“Show on Map”
Touch to browse information about guidance
route, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to be
displayed on the screen, to record the route, etc.
92, 299
Zoom in button Touch to magnify the map scale. 41
“Map Mode” Touch to display the “Map Mode” screen. 38
“MAP/VOICE”
button
Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel the
screen scroll, start guidance, and display the cur-
rent position.
33
“DEST” button Press to display the “Destination” screen. 12, 14, 16,
17, 20, 56
Distance and
time to destina-
tion
Touch to display the distance, estimated travel
and arrival time to the destination. 84
XM indicator This mark is displayed when XM information is re-
ceived. 297, 299
“GPS” mark (Glo-
bal Positioning
System)
Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from
the GPS, this mark is displayed. 126
No. Name Function Page
12
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. REGISTERING HOME
Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Go Home”.
If a home address has not been regis-
tered, it can be registered by touching
“Go Home”.
Touch “Yes”.
There are 4 different methods to
search your home. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH” on page 56.)
Touch “Enter”.
The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
13
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Touch “OK”.
Registration of home is complete.
Home can also be registered by touch-
ing “Navigation” on the “Setup” screen.
(See “REGISTERING HOME” on page
97.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
HOME” on page 98.)
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page
57.)
6
14
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS
Press the “DEST” button.
Touch one of the preset destina-
tion buttons.
A preset destination can be set to any
preset destination button that has not
yet been set.
Touch “Yes”.
There are 4 different methods to
search preset destinations. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on
page 56.)
Touch “Enter”.
The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is
displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
15
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Touch “OK”.
Registration of preset destinations is
complete.
Preset destinations can also be regis-
tered by touching “Navigation” on the
“Setup” screen. (See “REGISTERING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 99.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page
100.)
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTI-
NATIONS” on page 57.)
6
16
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE
Press the “DEST” button.
There are 10 different methods to
search destinations. (See “DES-
TINATION SEARCH” on page 56.)
Page 1
Page 2
Touch “Go to ”.
The navigation system performs a
search for the route.
Touch “OK”, and start driving.
Routes other than the one recommend-
ed can also be selected. (See “START-
ING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
1
2
3
4
17
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION
Press the “DEST” button.
Touch “Go Home”.
“Go Home” can be used if your home
address has been registered. (To regis-
ter home, see “REGISTERING HOME”
on page 97.)
Your home address is set as the desti-
nation. The navigation system performs
a search for the route.
Touch “OK”, and start driving.
Routes other than the one recommend-
ed can also be selected. (See “START-
ING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via
voice guidance.
1
2
3
18
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. FUNCTION INDEX
1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
Map
Route guidance
Displaying maps Page
Viewing the map screen 10
Displaying the current position 33
Viewing the current position vicinity map 33
Changing the scale 41
Changing the map orientation 41
Displaying Points of Interest 92
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 84
Selecting the map mode 38
Deleting map screen buttons 116
Displaying traffic information 298
Searching destinations Page
Searching the destination 56
Changing the selected search area 56
Operating the map location of the selected destination 74
Before starting route guidance Page
Setting the destination 74
Viewing alternative routes 76
Starting route guidance 74
Before starting or during route guidance Page
Viewing the route 74
Adding destinations 85
Changing the route 87
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 84
19
2. FUNCTION INDEX
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Useful functions
During route guidance Page
Pausing route guidance 91
Adjusting route guidance volume 53
Deleting the destination 86
Displaying the entire route map 88
Address book Page
Registering address book entries 101
Marking icons on the map 103
Information Page
Displaying vehicle maintenance 120
Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page
Initiating Bluetooth®132
Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 141
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 148
Voice command system Page
Operating the system with your voice 268
20
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Destination” SCREEN
The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “DEST” button
to display the “Destination” screen.
No. Name Function Page
“Address” Touch to input a house number and the street ad-
dress using the input keys. 58
“Point of Interest” Touch to select one of the POIs that have already
been stored in the system’s database. 61
“Previous
Destinations”
Touch to select a destination from any of the last
100 previously set destinations and from the pre-
vious starting point.
67
“Address Book”
Touch to select the desired location from a regis-
tered entry in “Address book”. (To register ad-
dress book entries, see “REGISTERING
ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on page 102.)
68
21
3. QUICK REFERENCE
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“Del.Dest.” Touch to delete set destinations. 72
“Emergency”
Touch to select one of the 4 categories of emer-
gency service points that have already been
stored in the system’s database.
68
“Intersection &
Freeway”
Touch to enter the names of 2 intersecting streets
or a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This is
helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific
address, is known.
69
“Map” Touch to enable setting a destination by touching
a location on the map screen. 71
“Coordinates” Touch to enter latitude and longitude coordinates. 72
Preset
destination
buttons
Touch to select one of the 5 preset destination
points as a destination. If a preset destination
point has not been registered, a message will be
displayed asking if it is desirable to set a destina-
tion to the preset screen button. (To register a
preset destination, see “REGISTERING PRE-
SET DESTINATIONS” on page 99.)
57
“Go Home”
Touch to select your personal home address
without having to enter the address each time. If
a home address has not been registered, a mes-
sage will be displayed and the setting screen will
automatically appear. (To register home, see
“REGISTERING HOME” on page 97.)
57
No. Name Function Page
22
3. QUICK REFERENCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. “Setup” SCREEN
The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “SETUP” button to
display the “Setup” screen.
23
3. QUICK REFERENCE
1
QUICK GUIDE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
No. Name Function Page
“General”
Touch to change the selected language, opera-
tion sound, automatic screen change settings,
etc.
43
“Voice” Touch to set the voice guidance settings. 52
“Navigation”
Touch to set home, preset destinations, address
book, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previous
destinations.
96
“Display” Touch to adjust the contrast and brightness of the
screens, turn the display off, etc. 31
“Vehicle” Touch to set vehicle information such as mainte-
nance information. 120
“Other” Touch to set XM Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel
Prices. 301
“Audio” Touch to set iPod and HD Radio™ channel set-
tings. 264
“Bluetooth*” Touch to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth®
audio devices. 177
“Phone” Touch to set the phone sound, phonebook, mes-
sage settings, etc. 155
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
24
3. QUICK REFERENCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. “Information” SCREEN
This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, fuel consumption, etc.
Press the “INFO/APPS” (“INFO”) button to display the “Information” screen.
No. Name Function Page
“Apps” Touch to display the “Apps” screen. 308, 311
“Fuel
Consumption” Touch to display the fuel consumption screen. 282
“Traffic Incidents” Touch to display traffic incidents. 298
“Map Data” Touch to display map data information. 283
“XM Fuel Prices” Touch to display current fuel prices and gas sta-
tion locations information. 292
“XM
NavWeather” Touch to display weather information. 295
“XM Stocks” Touch to display personally selected stocks infor-
mation. 289
“XM Sports” Touch to display personally selected sports
teams information. 286
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
25
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. INITIAL SCREEN .......................... 26
2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION.... 27
3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION ............................... 28
4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .............. 31
SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT.... 31
5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION......... 33
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ........... 33
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION .......... 33
SWITCHING THE SCREENS ................ 38
MAP SCALE .......................................... 41
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP ............... 41
STANDARD MAP ICONS ...................... 42
1. GENERAL SETTINGS .................. 43
SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS .......................................... 43
2. VOICE SETTINGS......................... 52
SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS ........ 52
1BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION
2SETUP
BASIC FUNCTION
26
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
1. INITIAL SCREEN
1When the “POWER” switch is in AC-
CESSORY or ON mode, the initial
screen will be displayed and the sys-
tem will begin operating.
-After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen will be displayed.
-After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen automatically switches to the map
screen. (If a button other than the “MAP/
VOICE” button is pressed, the function’s
corresponding screen will be displayed.)
-Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual prefer-
ences. (See page 48.)
CAUTION
●When the vehicle is stopped with the
hybrid system operating, always apply
the parking brake for safety.
-When the navigation system is turned
on in a screen other than the map
screen, the “CAUTION” screen will be
displayed when the screen is changed
to the map screen for the first time after
it has been turned on.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
This system reminds users when to re-
place certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if regis-
tered) on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified
for a scheduled maintenance check,
the “Maintenance Reminder” screen
will be displayed when the navigation
system is turned on.
-This screen goes off if the screen is not
operated for several seconds.
-To prevent this screen from being dis-
played again, touch “Do Not Display
This Message Again”.
-To register maintenance information,
see “MAINTENANCE” on page 120.
27
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
This system is operated mainly by the
buttons on the screen. (Referred to as
screen buttons in this manual.)
-When a screen button is touched, a
beep sounds. (To set the beep sound,
see page 43.)
●To prevent damaging the screen, lightly
touch the screen buttons with your finger
pad.
●Do not operate or rub the screen with a
ballpoint pen, a mechanical pencil, fin-
ger nail, a pointy and/or hard object
because this will damage the screen.
●Do not objects other than your finger to
touch the screen.
●When wiping the touch screen, it is
advisable to wipe with a soft and dry
cloth wrapped around the finger. Do not
use chemical cleaners to clean the
touch screen, as they may damage the
touch screen. Also, be careful not to
apply excessive force on the screen.
INFORMATION
●If the system does not respond to touch-
ing a screen button, move your finger
away from the screen and then touch it
again.
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-
ated.
●To operate the touch screen, press
touch screen buttons properly with finger
pad.
●When dew condensation occurs inside
the touch screen, it is sometimes difficult
to operate the display properly. In such
case, please leave the screen
untouched and do not operate the touch
screen until dew condensation disap-
pears.
●The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
●In extremely cold conditions, the map
may not be displayed and the data input
by a user may be deleted. Also, the
screen buttons may be harder than
usual to depress.
●When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern
may appear on the screen due to optical
characteristics of the screen. If this is
disturbing, please operate the screen
without polarized sunglasses.
28
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
1Touch “A-Z” to display the alphabet
keys.
2Touch the keys directly to enter letters
or numbers.
: Touch to erase one character.
Touch and hold to continue erasing char-
acters.
-On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.
1Touch “Other” to display symbol keys.
2Touch the symbol keys directly to enter
symbols.
: Touch to erase one symbol. Touch
and hold to continue erasing symbols.
When searching for an address or
name, or entering data, letters and
numbers can be input via the screen.
-Keyboard layout can be changed. (See
page 47.)
TO INPUT LETTERS AND
NUMBERS
Icon Function
Touch to enter in lower case.
Touch to enter in upper case.
TO INPUT SYMBOLS
29
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “OK” to search for an address
or a name.
-Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name
is incomplete.
-The list will be displayed automatically if
the maximum number of characters is
entered or the number of matching items
is 5 or less.
TO DISPLAY THE LIST
●The number of matching items is shown
on the right side of the screen. If the
number of matching items is more than
999, the system displays “” on the
screen.
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When a list is displayed, use the appro-
priate screen button to scroll through
the list.
Icon Function
Touch to skip to the next or previ-
ous page.
Touch and hold or to scroll
through the displayed list.
This indicates the displayed
screen’s position.
If appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is
too long to display.
Touch to scroll to the end of the
name.
Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
30
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Sort”.
2Touch the desired sorting criteria.
SORTING
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be rearranged.
Screen button Function
“Distance”
Touch to sort in order of
distance from the current
position.
“Date” Touch to sort in order of
date.
“Category” Touch to sort in order of
category.
“Icon” Touch to sort in order of
icon.
“Name” Touch to sort in order of
name.
“Brand”
Touch to sort in order of
brand name. (XM func-
tions)
“Price” Touch to sort in order of
price. (XM functions)
31
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Display”.
Adjusting the screen display
“Camera”: Touch to adjust the image
the camera displays.
Adjusting the image the camera displays
“Map·Menu”: Touch to return to the
screen display settings.
1Touch “” or “” to select the desired
function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”).
The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image the cam-
era displays can be adjusted. The dis-
play can also be turned off, and/or
changed to either day or night mode.
(For information regarding audio/video
screen adjustment, see “AUDIO
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page
224.)
SCREEN SETTINGS
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTING SCREEN DISPLAY
AND CAMERA SETTINGS
CONTRAST AND BRIGHTNESS
ADJUSTMENT
The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to
the brightness of your surroundings.
The display can also be turned off.
32
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2Touch the desired screen button to ad-
just contrast and brightness.
3After adjusting the screen, touch
“OK”.
-The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
touched. To turn the screen back on,
press any button. The selected screen
appears.
1To display the screen in day mode,
even with the headlight switch on,
touch “Day Mode” for brightness and
contrast control.
-If the instrument panel light control switch
is turned fully to upper, the displays condi-
tion is not changed to night mode even if
headlight switch is turned on.
Screen button Function
“Contrast” “+” Touch to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
“Contrast” “-” Touch to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
“Brightness” “+” Touch to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-” Touch to darken the
screen.
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the head-
light switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode.
INFORMATION
●If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the hybrid sys-
tem turned off.
33
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
-The current position mark ( ) appears in
the center or bottom center of the map
screen.
-A street name will appear on the bottom of
the screen, depending on the scale of the
map ( ).
-The screen can be returned to this map
screen that shows the current position at
any time, from any screen by pressing the
“MAP/VOICE” button.
-Use the scroll feature to move the desired
point to the center of the screen for look-
ing at a point on the map that is different
from the current position.
-If a finger touches and holds the map
screen, it will continue scrolling in that
direction until the finger is removed.
-A street name, city name, etc. of the
touched point will be shown, depending
on the scale of the map ( ). Distance
from the current position to will also be
shown ( ).
CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY
When starting the navigation system,
the current position is displayed first.
This screen displays the current posi-
tion and a map of the surrounding ar-
ea.
-To correct the current position manually,
see page 117.
●While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map
moves.
●The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is auto-
matically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.
INFORMATION
●After 12-volt battery disconnection, or on
a new vehicle, the current position may
not be correct. As soon as the system
receives signals from the GPS, the cor-
rect current position is displayed.
SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION
When any point on the map is touched,
that point moves to the center of the
screen and is shown by the cursor
mark ( ).
34
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Enter ”.
-The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and
the route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
1Touch “Mark”.
2This screen is displayed.
-The registered point is shown by on the
map.
-After the screen is scrolled, the map
remains centered at the selected loca-
tion until another function is activated.
The current position mark will continue
to move along your actual route and
may move off the screen. When the
“MAP/VOICE” button is pressed, the
current position mark returns to the cen-
ter of the screen and the map moves as
the vehicle proceeds along the desig-
nated route.
-When the scroll feature is used, the cur-
rent position mark may disappear from
the screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE”
button to display the current position on
the map screen.
TO SET THE CURSOR
POSITION AS A DESTINATION
A specific point on the map can be set
as a destination using the scroll func-
tion.
TO REGISTER THE CURSOR
POSITION AS AN ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRY
Address book entry registration en-
ables easy access to a specific point.
-To change the icon or name, etc., see
“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES”
on page 102.
INFORMATION
●Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered. If there is an attempt to regis-
ter more than 100 address book entries,
an error message will appear.
35
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-To display information about an icon, set
the cursor on it.
■POI INFORMATION
1Touch “Info”.
2Information such as the name, ad-
dress, position and phone number are
displayed.
TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT
THE ICON WHERE THE
CURSOR IS SET
When the cursor is set on a POI icon,
the name and “Info” are displayed at
the top of the screen.
-If “Enter ” is touched, the cursor
position will be set as a destination.
-If a destination has already been set,
“Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.
“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the exist-
ing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a desti-
nation.
-To register this POI as an address book
entry, touch “Mark”. (See “REGISTER-
ING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on
page 102.)
-If is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
-The desired POI can be displayed on
the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 92.)
36
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFOR-
MATION
1Touch “Info”.
2Information such as the name, ad-
dress, position and phone number are
displayed.
When the cursor is set on an address
book entry icon, the name and “Info”
are displayed at the top of the screen.
-If “Enter ” is touched, the cursor
position will be set as a destination.
-If a destination has already been set,
“Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.
“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the exist-
ing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a desti-
nation.
-To edit an address book entry, touch
“Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES” on page 102.)
-To delete an address book entry, touch
“Delete”.
-If is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
37
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■DESTINATION INFORMATION
1Touch “Info”.
2Information such as the name, ad-
dress, position and phone number are
displayed.
-To delete a destination, touch “Delete”.
■XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMA-
TION
1Touch “Info”.
2Traffic information will be displayed on
the screen.
-To display detailed traffic event informa-
tion, touch “Detail”.
When the cursor is set on a destination
icon, the name and “Info” are dis-
played on the top of the screen.
-If is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
When the XM NavTraffic® icon on the
map screen is touched, the XM
NavTraffic® information bar will appear
on the upper part of the screen.
38
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Map Mode”.
2Touch the screen buttons to select the
desired configuration.
-Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.
SWITCHING THE SCREENS
Any of the screen configurations can
be selected.
Screen button Function
“Map Only”
Touch to display the single
map screen. (See page
39.)
“Turn List” Touch to display the turn
list screen. (See page 80.)
“Intersection”
Touch to display the inter-
section guidance screen
or the guidance screen on
the freeway. (See page
79.)
“Audio” Touch to display the audio
screen. (See page 39.)
“Fuel Con-
sumption”
Touch to display the fuel
consumption screen. (See
page 39.)
“Other Infor-
mation”
Touch to display the fol-
lowing 4 screen configura-
tions: “Dual map”,
“Compass”, “Turn-by-Turn
Arrow” and “Freeway Exit
List”.
“Dual map”
Touch to display the dual
map screen. (See page
39.)
“Compass”
Touch to display the com-
pass mode screen. (See
page 40.)
“Turn-by-Turn
Arrow”
Touch to display the turn-
by-turn arrow screen.
(See page 80.)
“Freeway Exit
List”
Touch to display the free-
way exit list screen. (See
page 78.)
Screen button Function
39
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■MAP ONLY
-The screen shows the single map.
■AUDIO
-Information on the current radio station or
track is displayed.
■FUEL CONSUMPTION
-Touching “” or “” allows selection of
the desired mode (“Energy Monitor”, “Trip
Information” or “Past Record”).
■DUAL MAP
-This screen shows the dual map. The map
on the left is the main map.
SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS
This is a regular map screen.
-While on a different screen, touching
“Map Only” will display the single map
screen.
The audio screen and the map screen
are displayed.
-If a different screen is displayed, touch
“Audio” on the “Map Mode” screen.
-For audio system operation, refer to
“AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERA-
TION”. (See page 190.)
The fuel consumption screen and the
map screen are displayed.
-If a different screen is displayed, touch
“Fuel Consumption” on the “Map
Mode” screen.
-For an explanation on each fuel con-
sumption mode, refer to “FUEL CON-
SUMPTION”. (See page 282.)
The map screen can be split into two.
-While on a different screen, touching
“Dual map” will display the dual map
screen.
40
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■EDITING RIGHT MAP
1Touch the desired screen button.
-The following procedures can be per-
formed on this screen:
2Touch “OK” when editing is complet-
ed.
-The screen returns to the dual map
screen.
■COMPASS
-Information about the destination, current
position and a compass is displayed on
the screen.
The right side map can be edited by
touching any point on the right side
map.
No. Function
Changing the orientation of the map
Displaying POI icons
Showing XM NavTraffic® information
(See page 299.)
Changing the map scale
The current position is indicated with a
compass.
-While on a different screen, touching
“Compass” will display the compass
mode screen.
INFORMATION
●The destination mark is displayed in the
direction of the destination. When driv-
ing, refer to the longitude and latitude
coordinates, and the compass, to make
sure that the vehicle is headed in the
direction of the destination.
●When the vehicle travels out of the cov-
erage area, the guidance screen
changes to the compass mode screen.
41
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch or to change the scale
of the map screen.
-The scale bar and indicator at the bottom
of the screen indicate the map scale
menu. The scale range is from 150 ft. (50
m) to 250 miles (400 km).
-Touch and hold or to continue
changing the scale of the map screen.
-The scale of the map screen can be
changed by touching the scale bar
directly. This function is not available while
driving.
1Touch or .
North-up screen
Heading-up screen
: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle trav-
el, north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
MAP SCALE
●The map scale is displayed under the
north-up or heading-up symbol at the
top left of the screen.
●When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 250 miles (400 km), is not
shown. When the map scale is at the
minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is
not shown.
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP
The orientation of the map can be
changed from north-up to heading-up
by touching the orientation symbol at
the top left of the screen.
-Both the north-up and heading-up sym-
bols display the vehicles direction as a
letter (e.g. N for north).
42
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon Name
Island
Park
Industry
Business facility
Airport
Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf
43
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. SETUP
1. GENERAL SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General”.
3Touch the items to be set.
4Touch “Save”.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
Used for language selection and the
on/off settings of operation sounds and
automatic screen change, etc.
SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS
44
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
No. Function
Touch to change the time zone and
select “On” or “Off” for daylight sav-
ing time. (See “SYSTEM TIME SET-
TINGS” on page 45.)
Touch to change the language. (See
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46.)
Touch to change the distance unit.
(See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT” on
page 46.)
Touch to turn the sound beeps “On”
or “Off”.
Touch to change the screen button
color. (See “SELECTING A BUTTON
COLOR” on page 47.)
Touch to change the keyboard lay-
out. (See “SELECTING A KEY-
BOARD LAYOUT” on page 47.)
Touch to customize the startup im-
age. (See “CHANGING THE START-
UP IMAGE” on page 48.)
Touch to customize the screen off
image. (See “CHANGING THE
SCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page 50.)
Touch to set automatic screen
changes from the audio/video control
screen to the previous screen to
“On” or “Off”. If “On” is touched,
the screen will automatically return to
the previous screen from the audio/
video screen after 20 seconds.
Touch to delete personal data. (See
“DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on
page 51.)
Touch to update program versions.
For details, contact your Toyota deal-
er.
Touch to update gracenote database
versions. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
No. Function
45
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “System Time”.
4Touch the items to be set.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
5Touch “Save”.
■TIME ZONE
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “System Time” on the
“General Settings” screen.
4Touch “Time Zone”.
5Touch the desired time zone.
-If “Other” is touched, the zone can be
adjusted manually. Touch “+” or “-” to
adjust the time zone and then touch
“OK”.
6Touch “Save”.
SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS
Used for changing time zones and the
on/off settings of daylight saving time.
No. Function
Touch to change the time zone. (See
“TIME ZONE” on page 45.)
Touch to select “On” or “Off” for
daylight saving time.
A time zone can be selected and GMT
can be set.
46
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Language”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
5Touch “Yes”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
6Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Unit of Measurement”.
4Touch “km” or “mile”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
5Touch “Save”.
SELECTING A LANGUAGE
The language can be changed.
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
Distance unit can be changed.
-This function is available only in English
or Spanish. To change language, see
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page
46.
47
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Button Color”.
4Touch the desired screen button color.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
5Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Keyboard Layout”.
4Touch “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Key-
board Layout” to change the keyboard
layout.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
5Touch “Save”.
SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR
The color of the screen buttons can be
changed.
SELECTING A KEYBOARD
LAYOUT
Keyboard layout can be changed.
48
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■LAYOUT TYPE
“ABC” type
“QWERTY” type
CHANGING THE STARTUP
IMAGE
When the “POWER” switch is in AC-
CESSORY or ON mode, the initial
screen will be displayed.
An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup im-
age. (For information regarding the
startup image, see “INITIAL SCREEN”
on page 26.)
INFORMATION
●When saving the images to a USB,
name the folder that the startup image is
saved to “StartupImage” and name the
folder that the screen off image is saved
to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder
names are not used, the navigation sys-
tem cannot download the images. (The
folder names are case sensitive.)
●The images file extension is JPG or
JPEG.
●The images file name, including the file
extension, can be up to 32 characters.
●Image files of 10 MB or less can be
saved.
●Up to 3 images can be downloaded.
49
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TRANSFERRING DATA
1Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
2Press the “SETUP” button.
3Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
4Touch “Customize Startup Image”.
5Touch “Transfer”.
6Touch “Yes”.
■SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Customize Startup Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.
4Touch the desired image.
5Touch “Save”.
■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-
ES
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Customize Startup Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete All”.
5Touch “Yes”.
50
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TRANSFERRING DATA
1Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
2Press the “SETUP” button.
3Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
4Touch “Customize Screen Off Im-
age”.
5Touch “Transfer”.
6Touch “Yes”.
■SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Customize Screen Off Im-
age” on the “General Settings” screen.
4Touch the desired image.
5Touch “Save”.
CHANGING THE SCREEN OFF
IMAGE
Touch “Screen Off” to turn off the
screen. An image can be copied from a
USB memory and can be set to display
when “Screen Off” is touched. (For
more information on “Screen Off”,
see “SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on
page 31.)
51
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-
ES
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Customize Screen Off Im-
age” on the “General Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete All”.
5Touch “Yes”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Delete Personal Data”.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch “Yes”.
-The following personal data can be
deleted or returned to their default set-
tings:
• Maintenance conditions
• Maintenance information off setting
• Address book
• Areas to avoid
• Previous points
• Route guidance
• Route trace
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
•Bluetooth
® phone data
• Phone sound settings
• Phone display settings
• Message settings
• Audio setting
•Bluetooth
® audio setting
• Startup image data
• Screen off image data
• Downloaded Apps
DELETING PERSONAL DATA
INFORMATION
●This function is not available while driv-
ing.
52
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. VOICE SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Voice”.
3Touch the items to be set.
4Touch “Save”.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
Voice guidance etc. can be set. SCREEN FOR VOICE
SETTINGS
No. Function
The voice guidance volume can be
adjusted or switched off. (See
“VOICE VOLUME” on page 53.)
Voice guidance during route guid-
ance can be set to “On” or “Off”.
Voice guidance during audio system
use can be set to “On” or “Off”.
Voice recognition prompts can be set
to “On” or “Off”. This setting can
also be changed on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen. (See page 268.)
When “On” is selected, the audio/
video system can be operated using
voice commands.
53
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
3Select the desired level by touching the
appropriate number.
-If voice guidance is not needed, touch
“Off” to disable the feature.
4Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “On” of “Traffic Incident Warn-
ing”.
4Touch “Save”.
When using the traffic information
function, voice guidance can be set
to “On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC IN-
CIDENT WARNING” on page 53.)
When using the XM NavWeather™
function, the severe weather warning
can be set to “On” or “Off”.
VOICE VOLUME
The voice guidance volume can be ad-
justed or switched off.
No. Function TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING
Traffic congestion information can be
received via voice guidance while be-
ing guided to the desired destination.
INFORMATION
●When the “Traffic Information” indica-
tor is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flow-
ing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
295.)
54
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. DESTINATION SEARCH............... 56
SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ........ 56
DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME...... 57
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
PRESET DESTINATIONS................... 57
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address” ............................................. 58
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Point of Interest” ................................. 61
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Previous Destinations”........................ 67
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book” .................................... 68
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Emergency” ........................................ 68
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Intersection & Freeway”...................... 69
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map” ....... 71
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Coordinates” ....................................... 72
DELETING SET DESTINATIONS.......... 72
2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ... 74
1DESTINATION SEARCH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3
3
55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN....... 78
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS.................................... 81
3. DISTANCE AND TIME
TO DESTINATION....................... 84
4. SETTING AND DELETING
DESTINATIONS........................... 85
ADDING DESTINATIONS ..................... 85
REORDERING DESTINATIONS........... 85
DELETING DESTINATIONS ................. 86
5. SETTING ROUTE .......................... 87
DETOUR SETTING............................... 87
ROUTE OVERVIEW.............................. 88
ROUTE PREFERENCE ........................ 89
PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE ......................................... 91
SHOW ON MAP .................................... 92
ROUTE TRACE..................................... 95
1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS ............. 96
SETTING UP THE “Home” .................... 97
SETTING UP THE
“Preset Destinations”........................... 99
SETTING UP THE “Address Book” ..... 101
SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid” .... 106
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS................................ 110
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................. 112
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS ........................................ 112
2. VEHICLE SETTINGS .................. 120
MAINTENANCE................................... 120
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION............... 125
1. LIMITATIONS OF
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .... 126
2ROUTE GUIDANCE 3ADDRESS BOOK
4SETUP
5GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
56
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1Press the “DEST” button.
2This screen is displayed.
-One of 10 different methods can be used
to search a destination. (See pages 57
through 72.)
1Touch “Change State/Province” to
display a list of the states/provinces/
territories of the United States and
Canada.
2Touch the desired state (province).
-The previous screen will be displayed.
INFORMATION
●When searching a destination, the
response to the screen button may be
slow.
SELECTING THE SEARCH
AREA
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a dif-
ferent state (province) by using “Ad-
dress”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.
-For map database information and
updates, see “MAP DATABASE VER-
SION AND COVERAGE AREA” on
page 283.
-If a state (province) has not been
selected yet, “Select State/Province”
is displayed.
57
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Go Home”.
-Your home address is set as the destina-
tion. The navigation system performs a
search for the route.
3Touch “OK”.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch any of the preset destination
buttons (1-5).
-The selected preset destination point is
set as the destination. The navigation sys-
tem performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
3Touch “OK”.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
HOME
-To use this function, it is necessary to
set a home address. (To register home,
see page 97.)
●If a home address has not been regis-
tered, a message confirming if it is desir-
able to set a home will be displayed, and
the setting screen will appear.
●Guidance starts from the current posi-
tion to the set home address if “OK” is
touched even while driving.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
PRESET DESTINATIONS
-To use this function, it is necessary to
set preset destinations to the preset
screen buttons (1-5). (See “REGISTER-
ING PRESET DESTINATIONS” on
page 99.)
INFORMATION
●If a preset destination point has not been
registered, a message confirming if it is
desirable to set a preset destination will
be displayed, and the setting screen will
appear.
●Guidance starts from the current posi-
tion to the preset destination point if
“OK” is touched even while driving.
58
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
3Select the desired search method.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
3Touch “City”.
4Input a city name.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address”
There are 2 methods to search a desti-
nation by address:
(a)Search by city
(b)Search by street address
SELECTING A CITY TO
SEARCH
59
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Input the street name and touch “OK”.
7When the desired street name is
found, touch the corresponding screen
button.
-When the desired street name is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
8Input a house number.
-If the same address exists in more than 1
city, the current screen changes to the
address list screen.
■SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5
CITIES
1Touch “Last 5 Cities”.
2Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
-The current screen changes to the
screen for inputting a street name. (See
“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on
page 58.)
INFORMATION
●If the navigation system has never been
used, this function will not be available.
60
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
3Touch “Street Address”.
4Touch numbers directly on the screen
to input the house number.
-After inputting the house number, touch
“OK” to display the screen for inputting
the street name.
5Input the street name and touch “OK”.
6When the desired street name is
found, touch the corresponding screen
button.
-When the desired street name is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
-If the same address exists in more than 1
city, a screen requesting the city name to
be input or selected will be displayed.
7Input a city name.
8Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
SEARCH BY STREET
ADDRESS
61
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.
3Select the desired search method.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.
3Touch “Name” on the “Point of Inter-
est” screen.
4Input the name of the POI.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.
-When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
-When inputting the name of a specific
POI, and there are 2 or more sites with the
same name, the list screen is displayed.
●A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
●For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by input-
ting “S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN
AVE” or “WESTERN”.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Point of Interest”
There are 3 methods to search a desti-
nation by Points of Interest:
(a)Search by name
(b)Search by category
(c)Search by phone #
SEARCH BY “Name”
62
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.
-If the same name exists in more than 1
city, a search can be performed more eas-
ily using “City” or “Category”. (See
“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on
page 62 and “SELECTING FROM THE
CATEGORIES” on page 63.)
■SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH
1Touch “City”.
2Input the city name.
-To cancel the city setting, touch “Any
City”.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
-The desired POI can be displayed on
the map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 92.)
INFORMATION
●To search for a facility name using multi-
ple search words, put a space between
each word.
63
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-
RIES
1Touch “Category”.
2Touch the screen button of the desired
category.
-If the desired POI category is on the
screen, touch its screen button to display
a detailed list of the POI category.
-If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
-When the desired category is touched, the
POI name list screen is displayed.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.
3Touch “Category”.
4This screen is displayed.
-On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
SEARCH BY “Category”
The destination can be set by touching
the search point and the POI category.
No. Function
Touch to set the search point from
near the current position.
Touch to set the search point from
along the selected route.
Touch to set the search point from
near a city center.
Touch to set the search point from
near a destination.
64
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR HERE
1Touch “Near Here”.
-The search point is set at the current posi-
tion, and the “POI Category” screen will be
displayed. (See page 66.)
■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM ALONG MY ROUTE
1Touch “Along My Route”.
-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-
gory” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR CITY CENTER
1Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.
2Input the city center name.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
city center name.
-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-
gory” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.
INFORMATION
●The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be dis-
played.
65
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5
CITIES
1Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.
2Touch “Last 5 Cities”.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
city center name.
-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-
gory” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.
■SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR A DESTINATION
1Touch “Near a Destination”.
2Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.
-The search point is set and the “POI Cate-
gory” screen will be displayed. (See page
66.)
66
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THE
SEARCH POINT
1Touch the desired POI category.
-If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
-If “Favorite POI Categories” is touched,
a search can be performed using the 6
POIs that have been previously set. For
more details, see “POI CATEGORY
CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)” on page
115.
2Touch the desired POI category from
the list.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
item.
-When the desired item is selected, the
“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-
played. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation sys-
tem performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
When the search point is set, the “POI
Category” screen will be displayed.
67
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Point of Interest” on the
“Destination” screen.
3Touch “Phone #” on the “Point of In-
terest” screen.
4Input a phone number.
5After inputting a phone number, touch
“OK”.
-When a phone number is input, the “Con-
firm Destination” screen may be dis-
played. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation sys-
tem performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
-If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the following screen will be dis-
played.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Previous Destinations” on
the “Destination” screen.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.
-The previous starting point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed
on the screen.
“Delete”: Touch to delete the previous
destination. (To delete previous destina-
tions, see page 72.)
-When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
SEARCH BY “Phone #”
-To set an address book entry as a desti-
nation using the phone number, the
number must already be registered with
the address book entry. (See page 105.)
INFORMATION
●If there is no match for the phone num-
ber input, a list of identical numbers with
different area codes will be displayed.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Previous Destinations”
68
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Address Book” on the “Desti-
nation” screen.
3Touch the screen button of the desired
address book entry.
-A list of registered address book entries is
displayed.
“Options”: Touch to register or edit ad-
dress book entries. (See page 102.)
-When the desired address book entry is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navi-
gation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUID-
ANCE” on page 74.)
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Emergency” on the “Destina-
tion” screen.
-The display changes to a screen to select
police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire
stations.
3Touch the desired emergency catego-
ry.
-The selected emergency category is dis-
played.
4Touch the screen button of the desired
destination.
-When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
-The list of previous destinations can
also be deleted by touching “Delete
Previous Dest.” on the “Navigation
Settings” screen when the vehicle is
stopped. (See “DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS” on page 110.)
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book”
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Emergency”
69
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.
3Select the desired method.
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.
3Touch “Intersection” on the “Intersec-
tion & Freeway” screen.
4Input the name of the first intersecting
street which is located near the desti-
nation to be set, and touch “OK”.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
item.
6Input the name of the second intersect-
ing street.
●The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavail-
able. (See page 127.)
●The emergency function can be used
even while driving.
●While driving, only the currently dis-
played items and the items on the next
page can be viewed.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Intersection & Freeway”
There are 2 methods to search a desti-
nation by Intersection & Freeway:
(a)Search by intersection
(b)Search by freeway
SEARCH BY “Intersection”
70
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7Touch the screen button of the desired
item.
-When the desired item is selected, the
“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-
played. If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation sys-
tem performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 74.)
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on
the second page of the “Destination”
screen.
3Touch “Freeway Entrance / Exit” on
the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.
4Input a freeway name.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
freeway.
6Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.
INFORMATION
●If the same 2 streets cross at more than
1 intersection, the screen changes and
displays the menu to select the city
name where the streets intersect. Select
the city, and the map location of the
selected destination and the route pref-
erence. (See “STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
SEARCH BY “Freeway
Entrance / Exit”
71
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7Input a freeway entrance or exit name,
and touch “OK”.
8Touch the screen button of the desired
entrance or exit name.
-When the desired entrance or exit is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navi-
gation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUID-
ANCE” on page 74.)
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Map” on the second page of
the “Destination” screen.
3Scroll the map to the desired point.
4Touch “Go to ”.
-The navigation system performs a search
for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
●Be sure to use the complete name of the
freeway or highway, including the
hyphen, when entering the destination.
Freeways and interstates use an “I”
(I-405). US highways use the state des-
ignation before the number (CA-118).
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Map”
INFORMATION
●Guidance starts if “OK” is touched even
while driving. However, the cursor can-
not be moved.
72
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Coordinates” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.
3Input the latitude and the longitude.
4After inputting the latitude and longi-
tude, touch “OK”.
-When the desired screen button is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is touched on
the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navi-
gation system performs a search for the
route. (See “STARTING ROUTE GUID-
ANCE” on page 74.)
1Press the “DEST” button.
2Touch “Del.Dest.” on the “Destina-
tion” screen.
-When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.
3Touch the destination to be deleted.
“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destina-
tions on the list.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Coordinates”
DELETING SET
DESTINATIONS
A set destination can be deleted.
73
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Touch “Yes” to delete the destina-
tion(s).
-A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.
-If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-
sary.
-If “No” is touched, the previous screen
will be displayed.
-Set destinations can also be deleted by
touching “Route”. (See “DELETING
DESTINATIONS” on page 86.)
74
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
1Scroll the map to the desired point.
“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the
position in smaller increments.
-When an arrow facing the desired point is
touched, the map scrolls in that direction.
-The scroll stops when the selection of the
arrow is released.
2Touch “Go to ”.
-The system starts route search and dis-
plays recommended routes.
3To start guidance, touch “OK”.
When “Map” is touched on the “Con-
firm Destination” screen, the map
screen will be displayed. The map lo-
cation of the selected destination can
be set as a destination.
-If a destination has already been set,
“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be
displayed.
“Go to ”: Touch to delete the existing
destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add a desti-
nation.
“Info”: If this screen button is displayed
on the top of the screen, touch it to view
items such as name, address, position
and phone number.
No. Function
Current position
Destination point
Type of route and its distance
Distance of the entire route
75
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Touch to display a list of the turns re-
quired to reach the destination.
Touch to select the desired route
from 3 possible routes. (See page
76.)
Touch to change the route. (See
page 77.)
-Guidance can be paused or resumed.
(See “PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE” on page 91.)
-If “OK” is touched until a beep sounds,
demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/
VOICE” button to end demo mode.
●Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driv-
ing. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.
No. Function
INFORMATION
●The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
●The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route nor a
route without traffic congestion.
●Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
●When setting the destination on a map
with a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800
m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles
(800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set
the destination again.
●If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the desti-
nation. The road nearest to the point
selected is set as the destination.
76
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “3 Routes”.
2Touch “Preferred”, “Alternate” or
“Short”.
3 ROUTES SELECTION
No. Function
Touch to display the recommended
route.
Touch to display the alternative
route.
Touch to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destina-
tion.
Touch to display the information
shown below about each of the 3
routes.
No. Function
Time necessary for the entire trip
Distance of the entire trip
Toll road
Freeway
Ferry
77
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Edit Route”.
2This screen is displayed.
EDIT ROUTE
Conditions for the route to the destina-
tion can be set again.
No. Function Page
Touch to add destinations. 85
Touch to delete destina-
tions. 86
Touch to reorder destina-
tions. 85
Touch to display the choic-
es available when setting
the conditions the system
uses to determine the route
to the destination.
89
INFORMATION
●Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid includ-
ing a freeway in some cases. (See page
89.)
●If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After you travel by ferry, the cur-
rent position may be incorrect. Upon
reception of GPS signals, it is automati-
cally corrected.
78
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During route guidance, various types
of guidance screens can be displayed
depending on conditions.
SCREEN LAYOUT
No. Function
Distance to the next turn and an ar-
row indicating the turning direction
Guidance route
Current position
Distance and travel/arrival time to
the destination
Current street name
INFORMATION
●If the vehicle goes off the guidance
route, the route is searched again.
●For some areas, the roads have not
been completely digitized in our data-
base. For this reason, the route guid-
ance may select a road that should not
be traveled on.
●When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on
the top of the screen. Touching “Off”
clears the display.
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING
During freeway driving, the freeway
exit information screen will be dis-
played.
This screen displays the distance to
the next junction/exit, or POIs in the vi-
cinity of the freeway exit.
No./
Icon Function
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Exit number and junction name
Current position
POIs that are close to a freeway exit
Current street name
Touch to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
Touch to scroll to farther junctions or
exits.
Touch to scroll to closer junctions or
exits.
Touch to display the closest 3 junc-
tions or exits.
79
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
: Touch to hide the freeway guidance
screen.
-Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button, to change back to the
freeway guidance screen.
: Touch to hide the intersection guid-
ance screen.
-Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button, to change back to the
intersection guidance screen.
WHEN APPROACHING A
FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION
When the vehicle approaches an exit
or junction, the freeway guidance
screen will be displayed.
No. Function
Next street name
Current position
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
WHEN APPROACHING AN
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an inter-
section, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.
No. Function
Next street name
Current position
Distance to the intersection
80
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TURN LIST SCREEN
1Touch “Turn List” during guidance to
display the turn list.
■ARROW SCREEN
1Touch “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” during
guidance to display the arrow screen.
OTHER SCREENS
On this screen, the list of turns on the
guidance route can be viewed.
No. Function
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Next street or destination name
Current street name
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
viewed.
No. Function
Exit number or street name
Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
Current street name
81
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersec-
tion, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s
voice guidance will provide various
messages.
No. Voice guidance
“Proceed about 5 miles to Main
street.”
“In half of a mile, right turn onto Main
street.”
“Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
●The street names may not be pro-
nounced correctly or clearly due to the
text-to-speech function.
●On freeways, interstates or other high-
ways with higher speed limits, the voice
guidance will be made at earlier points
than on city streets in order to allow time
to maneuver the vehicle.
0.5 miles
5 miles
No. Voice guidance
“Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic
circle.”
“In half of a mile, traffic circle ahead
and then the 3rd exit onto Main
street.”
“The 3rd exit ahead.”
“The exit ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
4 miles
0.5 miles
82
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
*: The system indicates a U-turn if the dis-
tance between 2 one-way roads (of oppo-
site directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) in
residential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in non-
residential areas.
-The system announces the approach to
the final destination.
No. Voice guidance
“In half of a mile, make a legal U-
turn.”
“Make a legal U-turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
No. Voice guidance
“In half of a mile, your destination is
ahead.”
“Your destination is ahead.”
“You have arrived at your destina-
tion. The route guidance is now fin-
ished.”
-If a voice guidance command cannot be
heard, press the “MAP/VOICE” button
to hear it again.
-To adjust the voice guidance volume,
see “VOICE VOLUME” on page 53.
INFORMATION
●If the system cannot determine the cur-
rent position correctly (in cases of poor
GPS signal reception), the voice guid-
ance may be early or late.
83
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS
-After it has made a route calculation, the
system will advise the user whether IPD
roads are included in the route or not.
-The portion of the route that covers IPD
roads is indicated by light blue.
Even when on IPD roads (roads that
are not completely digitized in our da-
tabase), you will be guided along the
searched route via voice guidance.
No. Voice guidance
“On the way to your destination,
there will be roads with incomplete
data.”
“In half of a mile, left turn.”
“Next left. Upcoming roads have in-
complete data. Please carefully ob-
serve the local traffic restrictions, as
they may not match the navigation
guidance.”
-IPD roads are roads that are not yet
completely digitized in our database.
However, their geometry, name and
administrative coding are already
known.
CAUTION
●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations
and keep the road condition in mind
especially when you are driving on IPD
roads. The route guidance may not have
the updated information such as the
direction of a one way street.
84
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION
1Touch the screen button indicated by
the arrow.
2Touch the number screen button to
display the desired destination.
-The distance, estimated travel time and
estimated arrival time from the current
position to the selected destination are
displayed.
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance and the estimated
travel/arrival time to the destination are
displayed. When the vehicle is not on
the guidance route, the distance and
direction of the destination are dis-
played.
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, the
distance and estimated travel/arrival
time from the current position to each
destination are displayed.
Icon Function
Estimated travel time is dis-
played.
Estimated arrival time is dis-
played.
Touch to switch to estimated ar-
rival time.
Touch to switch to estimated
travel time.
Displayed while driving off the
guidance route. The destination
direction is indicated by an ar-
row.
INFORMATION
●When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and
arrival time are calculated based on the
set vehicle speed information. (See
“DRIVING SPEEDS” on page 113.)
However, when the vehicle is not on the
guidance route, the distance is the linear
distance between the current position
and the destination.
85
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Add”.
3Input an additional destination in the
same way as a destination search.
(See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on
page 56.)
4Touch the desired “Add Destination
Here” to insert the new destination into
the route.
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Reorder”.
3Touch the desired destination and
touch “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order.
ADDING DESTINATIONS
Destinations can be added and routes
can be searched again.
REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
When more than 1 destination is set,
the arrival order of the destinations can
be changed.
86
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4After selecting the destinations, touch
“OK”.
-The system searches for the guidance
route again, and displays the entire route.
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Delete”.
-When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.
3Touch the destination to be deleted.
“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destina-
tions on the list.
-A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.
4Touch “Yes” to delete the destina-
tion(s).
-If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-
sary.
-If “No” is touched, the previous screen
will be displayed.
DELETING DESTINATIONS
A set destination can be deleted.
87
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. SETTING ROUTE
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Detour”.
3Touch a screen button to select the de-
sired detour distance.
“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles
(km)”: Touch one of these screen buttons
to start the detour process. After detouring,
the system returns to the original guidance
route.
“Whole Route”: Touch to make the sys-
tem calculate an entire new route to the
destination.
“Around Traffic”: Touch to make the sys-
tem search for the route based on the traf-
fic congestion information received from
XM NavTraffic®. For details, see “XM
NavTraffic®” on page 298.
DETOUR SETTING
While the route guidance is operating,
the route can be changed to detour
around a section of the route where a
delay is caused by road repairs, or an
accident, etc.
INFORMATION
●This picture shows an example of how
the system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an
accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour sug-
gested by the system.
●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
●The system may not be able to calculate
a detour route depending on the
selected distance and surrounding road
conditions.
88
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Overview”.
3The entire route from the current posi-
tion to the destination is displayed.
1Touch or to skip to the next page
of the list of roads. Touch and hold
or to scroll through the list of roads.
: This mark indicates the direction in
which you should turn at the intersection.
“Map”: The selected point is displayed
on the map screen.
ROUTE OVERVIEW
No. Function
Touch to display a list of the turns re-
quired to reach the destination.
Touch to start guidance.
TURN LIST
INFORMATION
●However, not all road names in the route
may appear on the list. If a road
changes its name without requiring a
turn (such as on a street that runs
through 2 or more cities), the name
change will not appear on the list. The
street names will be displayed in order
from the starting point, along with the
distance to the next turn.
89
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Preferences”.
3Touch “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alter-
nate” and touch “OK”.
4The entire route from the starting point
to the destination is displayed.
“OK”: Touch to start guidance.
1Touch “Route”.
ROUTE PREFERENCE
TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE
The Preferred, Short or Alternative
route can be selected.
“Edit Route”: Touch to change a route.
(See page 77.)
TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES
A number of choices are available
when setting the conditions the system
uses to determine the route to the des-
tination.
90
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2Touch “Preferences” to display condi-
tions that can be selected when the
system determines the route to the
destination.
3Select the desired route preferences.
-The system will avoid using routes that
include items whose indicators are off.
4After selecting the desired route prefer-
ence, touch “OK”.
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Preferences”.
3Touch “Start from Adjacent Road”.
STARTING ROUTE FROM
ADJACENT ROAD
The route guidance can be started
from an adjacent road.
(e.g. When route guidance is set on the
freeway, but the vehicle is driven paral-
lel along the freeway.)
INFORMATION
●When there is no adjacent road, this
screen button will not be displayed.
91
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Pause Guidance”.
-The screen will return to the current posi-
tion map without route guidance.
1Touch “Route”.
2Touch “Resume Guidance”.
-The map screen, with the current position
displayed, will be returned to.
PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE
TO PAUSE GUIDANCE
●Without route guidance, “Pause Guid-
ance” cannot be used.
TO RESUME GUIDANCE
92
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Show on Map”.
2Touch “Select POI” to display a partic-
ular type of POI icon on the screen.
-When the POI icons to be displayed on
the map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.
-A screen with a limited choice of POIs will
be displayed. (To change the displayed
POI list, see page 115.)
1Touch the desired POI category to dis-
play POI location icons on the map
screen.
-By touching the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
-To turn off the POI icons on the map
screen, touch “Clear”.
“Other POIs”: Touch to display other
POIs categories if the desired POIs cannot
be found on the limited choice screen.
“Find Local POI”: Touch to search for the
nearest POIs. Then select one of the cate-
gories. The system will list the points within
20 miles (32 km). (See page 93.)
2Touch “Other POIs” on the “Select
POI Icons” screen.
-When a POI category is selected from
either the limited list or the complete list,
the icons of those locations will be dis-
played on the map screen.
SHOW ON MAP
DISPLAY POI ICONS
POI icons such as gas stations and
restaurants can be displayed on the
map screen. Their location can also be
set as a destination and used for route
guidance.
SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE
DISPLAYED
Up to 5 categories of icons can be dis-
played on the map screen.
93
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Touch the desired POI categories.
-The selected category’s icon will appear
on the top left of the screen.
-By touching the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
-If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
-Touch the desired POI categories from the
list.
• The selected category icon appears on
the top left of the screen.
• By touching the desired POI category
and then touching “OK”, the selected
POI icons are displayed on the map
screen.
• To return to the POI category selection
screen, touch “More”.
1Touch “Find Local POI”.
2Touch the screen button of the desired
POI.
-The selected POIs are displayed on the
map screen.
“Near...”: Touch to search for POIs near
the current position or along the route.
TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI
LIST
Points of Interest that are within
20 miles (32 km) of the current position
will be listed from among the selected
categories.
94
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Directly touch the desired POI icon to
set it as a destination.
-The map will shift so that the icon is cen-
tered on the screen and overlaps with the
cursor . At this time, the distance from
the current position is displayed on the
screen. The distance shown is measured
as a straight line from the current position
to the POI.
2When the desired POI overlaps with the
cursor, touch “Enter ”.
-The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and
route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
1Touch “Show on Map”.
2Touch “POI Icons”.
-The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.
-The map screen will be displayed with the
POI icons hidden.
-To display the POI icons again, touch
“POI Icons” on the “Show on Map”
screen.
No. Function
Touch to display the list of POIs near
the current position.
Touch to display the list of POIs
along the route.
TO SET A POI AS A
DESTINATION
One of the Point of Interest icons can
be selected on the map screen as a
destination and can be used for route
guidance.
TO HIDE POI ICONS
95
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Show on Map”.
2Touch “Route Trace”.
-The “Route Trace” indicator is high-
lighted.
1Touch “Show on Map”.
2Touch “Route Trace”.
-Touching “Yes” stops recording and the
route trace remains displayed on the
screen.
-Touching “No” stops recording and the
route trace is erased.
ROUTE TRACE
Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the trav-
eled route can be stored and retraced
on the display.
●This feature is available when the map
scale is more than 30 miles (50 km).
TO START RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE
TO STOP RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE
96
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. ADDRESS BOOK
1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation”.
3Touch the desired items to be set.
-On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
Points or areas on the map can be reg-
istered.
The registered points can be used on
the “Destination” screen. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH BY HOME” on
page 57, and “DESTINATION
SEARCH BY “Address Book”” on page
68.)
Registered areas to avoid, will be
avoided when the system searches for
a route.
No. Function Page
Touch to set home. 97
Touch to set preset desti-
nations. 99
Touch to set the address
book. 101
Touch to set areas to
avoid. 106
Touch to delete previous
destinations. 110
Touch to set detailed navi-
gation settings. 112
97
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Home”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Set-
tings” screen.
4Touch “Set Home”.
5Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH” on page 56.)
-When registration of home is completed,
the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.
6Touch “OK”.
SETTING UP THE “Home”
If home has been registered, that infor-
mation can be recalled by touching
“Go Home” on the “Destination”
screen. (See “DESTINATION
SEARCH BY HOME” on page 57.)
No. Function Page
Registering home 97
Editing home 98
Deleting home 98
REGISTERING HOME
-To edit registered information, see
“EDITING HOME” on page 98.
98
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Set-
tings” screen.
4Touch “Edit”.
5Touch “Edit” next to the item to be ed-
ited.
“Show Name on Map”: The name of a
home can be set to be displayed on the
map by touching “On” or “Off”. (See page
104.)
6Touch “OK”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Set-
tings” screen.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch “Yes” to delete home and touch
“No” to cancel the deletion.
EDITING HOME
No. Function Page
Touch to edit the home
name. The name can be
displayed on the map.
104
Touch to edit location infor-
mation. 104
Touch to edit the phone
number. 105
Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map. 103
DELETING HOME
99
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Preset Destinations”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Set”.
5Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH” on page 56.)
SETTING UP THE “Preset
Destinations”
If preset destination has been regis-
tered, that information can be recalled
by using “Preset Destinations” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRE-
SET DESTINATIONS” on page 57.)
No. Function Page
Registering a preset desti-
nation 99
Editing a preset destination 100
Deleting a preset destina-
tion 101
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
100
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch a position for this preset desti-
nation.
-When registration of a preset destination
is completed, the “Edit Preset Destination”
screen will be displayed.
7Touch “OK”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Edit”.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
preset destination.
6Touch “Edit” next to the item to be ed-
ited.
“Show Name on Map”: The name of a pre-
set destination can be set to be displayed
on the map by touching “On” or “Off”.
(See page 104.)
7Touch “OK”.
-To edit registered information, see
“EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS”
on page 100.
EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS No. Function Page
Touch to edit the preset
destination name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.
104
Touch to edit location infor-
mation. 104
Touch to edit the phone
number. 105
Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map. 103
101
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch the preset destination to be de-
leted.
6Touch “Delete”.
7Touch “Yes” to delete the preset des-
tination and touch “No” to cancel the
deletion.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Address Book”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
Screen button Function
“Select All” Touch to select all preset
destinations.
“Unselect All” Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.
SETTING UP THE “Address
Book”
Points or areas on the map can be reg-
istered.
No. Function Page
Registering address book
entries 102
Editing address book en-
tries 102
Deleting address book en-
tries 105
102
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Address Book” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “New”.
5Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “DESTI-
NATION SEARCH” on page 56.)
-After the address book entry has been
registered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”
screen will be displayed.
6Touch “OK”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Address Book” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Edit”.
5Touch the screen button of the desired
address book entry.
REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES
-To edit registered information, see
“EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES”
on page 102.
INFORMATION
●Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered.
EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.
103
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch “Edit” next to the item to be ed-
ited.
“Show Name on Map”: The name of an ad-
dress book entry can be set to be dis-
played on the map by touching “On” or
“Off”. (See page 104.)
7Touch “OK”.
■TO CHANGE “Icon”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Touch the desired icon.
-Change pages by touching the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.
■SOUND ICONS
1Touch the “With Sound” tab on the
“Address Book Entry Icon” screen.
2Touch the desired sound icon.
-The next screen appears when “Bell
(with Direction)” is touched.
No. Function Page
Touch to edit the address
book entry name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.
104
Touch to edit location infor-
mation. 104
Touch to edit the phone
number. 105
Touch to change the icon
to be displayed on the map. 103
A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle ap-
proaches the location of the address
book entry, the selected sound will be
heard.
104
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Touch either or to adjust the
direction. Then touch “OK”.
■TO CHANGE “Name”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Enter the name using the alphanumer-
ic keys.
-Up to 70 characters can be entered.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
■DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOK EN-
TRY NAMES
1Touch “On” to display the name on the
map and touch “Off” to not display it.
■TO CHANGE “Location”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor to the
desired point on the map.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
INFORMATION
●The bell sounds only when the vehicle
approaches this point in the direction
that has been set.
105
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TO CHANGE “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)
1Touch “Edit”.
2Enter the number using the number
keys.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Address Book” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch the address to be deleted.
6Touch “Delete”.
7Touch “Yes” to delete the address
book entries and touch “No” to cancel
the deletion.
DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
Screen button Function
“Select All” Touch to select all regis-
tered addresses.
“Unselect All” Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.
106
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Areas to Avoid”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “New”.
5Touch the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search, or display the
map of the area to be avoided. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page
56.)
SETTING UP THE “Areas to
Avoid”
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other rea-
sons can be registered as areas to
avoid.
No. Function Page
Registering areas to avoid 106
Editing areas to avoid 107
Deleting areas to avoid 110
REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID
107
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Scroll the map to the desired point.
“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the
position in smaller increments.
7Touch “Enter”.
8Touch either or to change
the size of the area to be avoided.
9Touch “OK”.
-When registration of an area to avoid is
completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen will
be displayed.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Edit”.
5Touch the area to be avoided.
●If a destination is input in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot be
made without running through the area
to avoid, a route passing through the
area to be avoided may be shown.
●Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.
EDITING AREA TO AVOID
The name, location and/or area size of
a registered area can be edited.
108
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch “Edit” next to the item to be ed-
ited.
“Show Name on Map”: The name of an
area to be avoided can be set to be dis-
played on the map by touching “On” or
“Off”. (See page 108.)
“Active”: The area to avoid feature can be
set to “On” or “Off”.
7Touch “OK”.
■TO CHANGE “Name”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Enter the name using the alphanumer-
ic keys.
-Up to 70 characters can be entered.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
■DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS
TO BE AVOIDED
1Touch “On”, next to “Show Name on
Map”, to display the name of an area to
be avoided on the map. Touch “Off”
not to display it.
No. Function Page
Touch to edit the name of
the area to avoid. The
name can be displayed on
the map.
108
Touch to edit area location. 109
Touch to edit area size. 109
109
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TO CHANGE “Location”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor to the
desired point on the map.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
■TO CHANGE “Size”
1Touch “Edit”.
2Touch either or to change
the size of the area to be avoided.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
110
3. ADDRESS BOOK
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navi-
gation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch the area to be deleted.
6Touch “Delete”.
7Touch “Yes” to delete the area(s) and
touch “No” to cancel the deletion.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Delete Previous Dest.”.
4Touch the previous destination to be
deleted.
DELETING AREAS TO AVOID
Screen button Function
“Select All” Touch to select all regis-
tered areas to avoid.
“Unselect All” Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Previous destinations can be deleted.
111
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5Touch “Delete”.
6Touch “Yes” to delete the destina-
tion(s) and touch “No” to cancel the
deletion.
Screen button Function
“Select All” Touch to select all previ-
ous destinations.
“Unselect All” Touch to cancel the
“Select All” function.
112
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. SETUP
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation”.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings”.
4Touch the items to be set.
5Touch “Save”.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
Settings are available for driving
speeds, favorite POI categories, auto-
matic screen change, “ Off” func-
tion, etc.
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS
113
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Driving Speeds”.
No. Function
Touch to set the average cruising
speed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS”
on page 113.)
Touch to set the automatic input
function to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to set the voice guidance for
the next street name to “On” or
“Off” during route guidance.
Touch to set the automatic reroute
of the guidance route to avoid heavy
congestion to “On” or “Off”. (See
“AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page
114.)
Touch to set the indication of freely
flowing traffic by the arrow to “On”
or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREE
FLOWING TRAFFIC” on page 115.)
Touch to set displayed POI icon cat-
egories. (See “POI CATEGORY
CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)”
on page 115.)
Touch to set screen buttons to be
displayed on the map screen when
“ Off” is selected. (See
“SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“ Off” Function)” on page 116.)
Touch to adjust the current position
mark manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted. (See “CUR-
RENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION” on page 117.)
Touch to set the display of pop-up
information to “On” or “Off”. (See
“POP-UP INFORMATION” on page
118.)
Touch to set IPD road guidance to
“On” or “Off”. (For information on
IPD roads, see page 83.)
DRIVING SPEEDS
The speed that is used for the calcula-
tion of the estimated travel time and
estimated arrival time can be set.
No. Function
114
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5Touch “” or “” to set the average
vehicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main
Streets” and “Freeways”.
-To set the default speeds, touch
“Default”.
-To use settings based on traffic informa-
tion, touch “Consider Traffic Info.”.
6After setting of the desired speeds is
completed, touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Avoid Traffic”.
5Touch “On” or “Off”.
6Touch “Save”.
-When congestion information about the
guidance route has been received, a
screen will appear to ask if it is desirable
to reroute to avoid the congestion.
-Touch “Yes” to reroute. Another route to
avoid the congestion will appear.
-Touch “No” if it is not desirable to reroute.
INFORMATION
●The displayed time to the destination is
the approximate driving time that is cal-
culated based on the selected speeds
and the actual position along the guid-
ance route.
●The time shown on the screen may vary
greatly depending on progress along the
route, which may be affected by condi-
tions such as traffic jams and construc-
tion work.
●Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be dis-
played.
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC
The guidance route automatically
changes to another route to avoid
heavy congestion when “Avoid Traf-
fic” is turned on.
INFORMATION
●When the “Traffic Information” indica-
tor is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flow-
ing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)
115
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Show Free Flowing Traffic”.
5Touch “On” or “Off”.
6Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Favorite POI Categories”.
5Touch the category to be changed.
SHOW FREE FLOWING
TRAFFIC
Free flowing traffic can be shown by an
arrow when “Show Free Flowing
Traffic” is turned on.
●When the “Traffic Information” indica-
tor is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flow-
ing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)
POI CATEGORY CHANGE
(SELECT POI ICONS)
Select up to 6 POI icons to be dis-
played on the map screen.
116
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch the desired group.
-If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
7Touch the desired category.
-The screen returns to the “Favorite POI
Categories” screen.
8Touch “OK”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch ““ Off” Function”.
5Touch the screen buttons to be turned
off. The selected screen buttons will be
dimmed.
-To set the setting as a default, touch
“Default”.
6Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
7Touch “Save”.
SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“ Off” Function)
Each screen button and current street
name on the map screen can be dis-
played or hidden.
117
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Calibration”.
5Touch the desired screen button.
■POSITION/DIRECTION CALIBRA-
TION
1Touch “Position / Direction”.
2Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor to the
desired point on the map.
3Touch “OK”.
CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
The current position mark can be ad-
justed manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted.
-For additional information on the accu-
racy of a current position, see “LIMITA-
TIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM” on page 126.
When driving, the current position
mark will be automatically corrected by
GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor
due to location, the current position
mark can be adjusted manually.
118
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Touch either or to adjust the
direction of the current position mark.
5Touch “OK”.
-The map will be displayed.
■TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION
1To perform the distance calibration
procedure, touch “Tire Change”.
-The message appears and the quick dis-
tance calibration is automatically started.
A few seconds later, a map will be dis-
played.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on
the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4Touch “Pop-up Information”.
5Touch “On” or “Off”.
6Touch “Save”.
-When “Pop-up Information” is turned
off, the following messages will not be dis-
played.
The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference differ-
ence between the old and new tires.
INFORMATION
●If this procedure is not performed when
the tires are replaced, the current posi-
tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.
POP-UP INFORMATION
When “Pop-up information” is turned
on, pop-up information will be dis-
played.
119
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
This message appears when the map
scale is over 0.5 miles (800 m).
This message appears when the map is
switched to dual map screen mode.
120
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. VEHICLE SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Vehicle”.
3Touch “Maintenance”.
4Touch the desired screen button.
-Setting maintenance information. (See
page 120.)
-Setting dealer. (See page 122.)
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
Settings” screen.
4Touch the desired screen button.
-When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.
MAINTENANCE
When the navigation system is turned
on, the “Maintenance Reminder”
screen displays when it is time to re-
place a part or certain components.
(See page 26.)
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
SETTING
121
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5Input the conditions.
Screen button Function
“Engine oil” Replace engine oil
“Oil filter” Replace engine oil filter
“Rotation” Rotate tires
“Tires” Replace tires
“Battery” Replace 12-volt battery
“Brake pad” Replace brake pads
“Wipers” Replace wiper blades
“Coolant” Replace coolant
“Brake oil” Replace brake fluid
“Trans. fluid” Replace transmission flu-
id
“Service” Scheduled maintenance
“Air filter” Replace air filter
“Personal”
New information items
can be created separate-
ly from provided ones.
“Delete All”
Touch to cancel all condi-
tions which have been in-
put.
“Reset All”
Touch to reset the item
which has satisfied a con-
dition.
“Set Dealer”
Touch to register dealer
information. (See “DEAL-
ER SETTING” on page
122.)
“Dealer Info.”
Touch to edit dealer infor-
mation. (See “DEALER
SETTING” on page 122.)
“Reminder”
When this screen button
is touched, the indicator
is illuminated. The sys-
tem is set to give mainte-
nance information with
the “Maintenance Re-
minder” screen. (See
page 26.)
Screen button Function
122
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch “OK”.
-The screen then returns to the
“Maintenance” screen.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Set Dealer”.
5If a dealer has not been registered, en-
ter the location of a dealer in the same
way as for a destination search. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page
56.)
-When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,
the “Dealer” screen is displayed.
No. Function
Touch to input the next maintenance
date.
Touch to input the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
Touch to cancel the date and dis-
tance conditions.
Touch to reset the date and distance
conditions.
INFORMATION
●For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
●Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance mainte-
nance should be performed may differ
from the stored date and distance in the
system.
DEALER SETTING
Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information
registered, route guidance to the deal-
er is available.
123
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch “Edit” next to the item to be ed-
ited.
■TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact”
1Touch “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Con-
tact”.
2Enter the name using the alphanumer-
ic keys.
-Up to 70 characters can be entered for
dealer and 24 characters for contact.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
No. Function
Touch to enter the name of a dealer.
(See page 123.)
Touch to enter the name of a dealer
member. (See page 123.)
Touch to set the location. (See page
124.)
Touch to enter the phone number.
(See page 124.)
Touch to delete the dealer informa-
tion displayed on the screen.
Touch to set the displayed dealer as
a destination. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 74.)
124
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■TO EDIT “Location”
1Touch “Edit” next to “Location”.
2Touch one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor to the
desired point on the map screen.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
■TO EDIT “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)
1Touch “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2Enter the number using number keys.
3Touch “OK”.
-The previous screen will be displayed.
125
4. SETUP
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Vehicle Customization”.
4Touch the desired items to be set.
-For a list of the settings that can be
changed, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
5After changing the settings, touch
“Save”. A message indicating that the
settings are being saved will appear.
Do not perform any other operations
while this message is displayed.
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION
Vehicle settings can be changed.
CAUTION
●When performing the customization pro-
cedure, ensure that there is sufficient
ventilation in the vehicle and surround-
ing area. If there is insufficient ventila-
tion, exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle. Exhaust gases include
harmful carbon monoxide (CO) and
inhaling them may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
INFORMATION
●To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery,
perform the customization procedure
with the hybrid system operating.
126
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-
veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-
ment of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites.
The GPS system has a certain level of in-
accuracy. While the navigation system will
compensate for this most of the time, oc-
casional positioning errors of up to 300 ft.
(100 m) can and should be expected. Gen-
erally, position errors will be corrected
within a few seconds.
When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically ob-
structed, leading to inaccurate vehicle po-
sition on the map screen. Tunnels, tall
buildings, trucks, or even the placement of
objects on the instrument panel may ob-
struct the GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals
due to repairs or improvements being
made to them.
Even when the navigation system is re-
ceiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle po-
sition may not be shown accurately or
inappropriate route guidance may occur in
some cases.
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite condi-
tions, road configuration, vehicle con-
dition or other circumstances.
NOTICE
●The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal recep-
tion of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of win-
dow tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.
127
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Y-
shaped road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.
-Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but
skip any of them, auto reroute will dis-
play a route returning to the destination
on the previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection
for which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the
route guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown
on the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regula-
tions prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other rea-
sons.
• The road and map data stored in the
navigation system may not be complete
or may not be the latest version.
-If the vehicle cannot receive GPS sig-
nals, the current position can be
adjusted manually. For information on
setting the current position calibration,
see page 117.
-After replacing a tire, implement the
operation described in “TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION”. (See page 118.)
128
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
INFORMATION
●This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with fac-
tory-specified tires for the vehicle.
Installing tires that are larger or smaller
than the originally equipped diameter
may cause inaccurate display of the cur-
rent position. The tire pressure also
affects the diameter of the tires, so make
sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is
correct.
4
129
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. QUICK REFERENCE................... 130
2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........ 132
USING THE PHONE SWITCH ............ 133
USING THE STEERING
SWITCHES ....................................... 134
ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK
IN THIS SYSTEM.............................. 134
WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING
OF THE VEHICLE............................. 135
3. REGISTER A Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 137
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 138
RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 140
4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE....................................... 141
BY DIAL............................................... 141
BY PHONEBOOK................................ 141
BY SPEED DIAL.................................. 143
BY CALL HISTORY............................. 143
BY VOICE RECOGNITION ................. 145
CALLING USING AN
SMS/MMS MESSAGE ...................... 147
BY POI* CALL ..................................... 147
5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 148
6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...................................... 149
WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”.................. 149
INCOMING CALL WAITING ................ 151
7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION ................................ 152
CHECKING MESSAGES..................... 152
REPLYING (QUICK REPLY) ............... 153
NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION ....... 154
1. PHONE SETTINGS ..................... 155
PHONE SOUND SETTINGS ............... 155
PHONEBOOK...................................... 157
MESSAGE SETTINGS ........................ 170
PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS ............. 174
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ............... 177
REGISTERED DEVICES..................... 177
SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 181
SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER ..... 183
DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ...... 184
1PHONE OPERATION
2SETUP
PHONE
*: Point of Interest
130
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. PHONE OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display
the hands-free operation screen, press the button or the switch on the steer-
ing wheel.
131
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
No. Name Function
The condition of
Bluetooth®
connection
No connection Good
An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument
panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate
and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used
in the following conditions and/or places:
The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).
The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.
When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is dis-
played.
The amount of
battery charge
left
Empty Full
This is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected.
The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount
displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge left
may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have.
This system does not have a charging function.
The receiving
area
“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area.
The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.
The level of
reception
Poor Excellent
The level of reception does not always correspond with the level dis-
played on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be dis-
played depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inac-
cessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
“SETUP” button
Press to display the “Setup” screen. Touching “Phone” or
“Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen displays the hands-free setup
screen.
button Press to display the hands-free operation screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
132
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2.
PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE)
*: This profile is necessary when using
Entune. (See “ENTUNE SERVICE” on
page 304.)
The hands-free system enables calls
to be made and received without hav-
ing to take your hands off the steering
wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone
is explained here.
-For registering and setting of the phone,
see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 155
and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page
177.
CAUTION
●While driving, do not use a cellular
phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-
makers or cardiac defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® anten-
nas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio
waves could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
●Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.
INFORMATION
●If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
●In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the
communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
●When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the follow-
ing problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.
●This system supports the following ser-
vices:
•Bluetooth
® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
•Profiles
HFP (Hands Free Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
MAP (Message Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher*
133
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
-The microphone can be used when talking
on the phone.
Type A
Type B
INFORMATION
●If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone
or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP pro-
files individually will not be possible.
●If the connected Bluetooth® phone ver-
sion is older than recommended or
incompatible, this function may not be
used.
●Refer to http://www.Toyota.com/
Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
phones for this system.
USING THE PHONE SWITCH
By pressing the phone switch, a call
can be received or ended without tak-
ing your hands off the steering wheel.
134
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Volume control switch
-Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
-Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-
ume.
-The following data is stored for every reg-
istered phone. When another phone is
connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION
●The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/video
system will be muted during phone calls
or when hands-free voice commands
are used.
●Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a mal-
function.)
●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible out-
side the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
●The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or net-
work being used.
USING THE STEERING
SWITCHES
ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN
THIS SYSTEM
INFORMATION
●When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
135
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-The following data in the system can be
initialized:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
U.S.A.
WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered
when the hands-free system is used.
When selling or disposing of the vehi-
cle, initialize the data. (See “DELET-
ING PERSONAL DATA” on page 51.)
●Once initialized, the data and settings
will be erased. Pay much attention when
initializing the data.
-FCC ID : HYQDNNS059
Type : DNNS059
IC : 1551A-DNNS059 Canada 310
-This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
●FCC WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with
at least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
●Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
136
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Canada
CAUTION
● NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions; (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif
doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage est susceptible de
compromettre le fonctionnement du
dispositif.
●This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 20
cm and more between the radiator and
person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie Canada pour un
environnement non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux
directives d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est utilisé, il est toutefois souhaitable de
laisser au moins 20 cm entre l’antenne
et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
CAUTION
●Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Co-implantation: cet émetteur ne doit
pas être co-implanté ou actionné en
même temps qu’aucune autre antenne
ou émetteur.
137
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Yes” to register a phone.
-If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to
be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®
devices have already been registered” on
page 138.
3When this screen is displayed, operate
the Bluetooth® device.
-Search for the navigation system dis-
played on the system’s screen using your
Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
-A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® phones. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone being
connected, a message confirming
registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth® phone according
to the confirmation message.
-To cancel the registration, touch
“Cancel”.
-If the Bluetooth® phone to be registered
has a Bluetooth® audio function, this can
be registered at the same time.
4This screen will be displayed when
registration is complete.
-When using the same phone, it is not nec-
essary to register it again.
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a phone with the
system. Once the phone has been reg-
istered, it is possible to make a hands-
free call.
If a Bluetooth® phone has not been
registered yet, it is necessary to regis-
ter it first according to the following pro-
cedure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot be
registered while driving.
-See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE” on page 178 of additional reg-
istration when registering.
138
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
When another Bluetooth® device is con-
nected
-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-
rently connected, this screen is displayed.
-To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-
ready been registered
1When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-
ready been registered, a registered de-
vice needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes”
to delete 1 or more.
2Touch the device to be deleted, then
touch “Remove”.
3Touch “Yes”.
If the Bluetooth® phone has a
Bluetooth® audio function
-When the Bluetooth® phone to be regis-
tered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this
audio function will be registered automati-
cally at the same time and this screen may
be displayed. If this screen is displayed,
touch “Yes” to connect the audio function
or touch “No” to cancel the connection.
-For automatic connection, see “CHANG-
ING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 185.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
AUTOMATICALLY
When a phone is registered, auto con-
nection is turned on. Always set it to
this mode and leave the Bluetooth®
phone in a location where connection
can be established.
139
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When the “POWER” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode, the system searches
for a nearby registered cellular phone.
-The system will connect with the phone
that was last connected, if it is nearby.
When “Display Phone Status” is set to
“On”, the connection status is displayed.
(See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNEC-
TION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” on
page 187.)
-This screen appears when the Bluetooth®
phone is first connected after the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Connect Phone”.
3Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired phone connection.
-When the cellular phone’s device name
has not been able to be obtained, “Device
1” to “Device 5” will be displayed in the
order the phones were registered.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
●It may take time if the phone connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® device
playback.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be nec-
essary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
MANUALLY
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® man-
ually.
140
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4This screen is displayed.
5When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed.
-Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone.
When a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing
-This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
-If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on
purpose, such as turning it off, this does
not happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth®
phone manually.
RECONNECTING THE
Bluetooth® PHONE
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode, the system automatically
reconnects the Bluetooth® phone.
When “Display Phone Status” is set
to “On”, the connection status is
displayed.
141
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch the desired key to input the
phone number.
-Each time is touched, an input digit
is deleted.
3Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel.
-Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be neces-
sary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
1Touch “Contacts”.
2Touch the desired data from the list.
After a Bluetooth® phone has been
registered, a call can be made using
the hands-free system. There are 7
methods by which a call can be made.
These are described below.
BY DIAL
A call can be made by inputting the
phone number.
This cannot be operated while driving.
BY PHONEBOOK
Calls can be made by using the phone-
book data which is transferred from the
registered cellular phone.
The phonebook changes depending
on the phone connected. Up to 1000
contacts (maximum of 3 numbers per
contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.
This cannot be operated while driving.
142
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Touch the desired number from the list.
4Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel.
1Touch “Contacts”.
2Touch “Yes” or “Transfer” to auto-
matically transfer the phonebook from
the connected phone.
-Touch “Manual” to transfer the phone-
book manually. (See “TRANSFERRING A
PHONE NUMBER” on page 158.)
-Touch “No” or “Cancel” to cancel trans-
ferring.
-If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot
be transferred.
PBAP compatible models
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models
3Transfer the phonebook data to the
system using the Bluetooth® phone.
-Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
-This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS
EMPTY
143
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4When the data transfer from a PBAP
incompatible but OPP compatible
model is complete, “Done” will appear
on the screen. Touch “Done”.
1Touch “Speed Dials”.
2Touch the desired number to call.
-The list to be displayed can be changed
by touching the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed
Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform addi-
tional steps on the phone when trans-
ferring phonebook data.
• The registered image on the phone-
book may not appear when phonebook
data is transferred.
BY SPEED DIAL
Calls can be made using registered
phone numbers which can be selected
from a phonebook. (See “REGISTER-
ING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 166
for registering the speed dial.)
This can be operated while driving.
BY CALL HISTORY
CALLS CAN BE MADE BY
CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4
FUNCTIONS
All: all calls (missed, incoming or out-
going)
Up to 25 call history items can be se-
lected from the “All” tab while driving.
Missed: calls that were missed
Incoming: calls that were received
Outgoing: calls that were made
144
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Call History”.
2Touch the desired data from the list.
-The list to be displayed can be changed
by touching the “All”, “Missed”, “Incom-
ing” or “Outgoing” tab.
3Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel.
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel to display the
“Phone” screen.
2Press the switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.
3Press the switch on the steering
wheel to select the latest history item.
4Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel to call the latest
history item.
-When making a call by phonebook, the
name (if registered) is displayed.
-When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
-When a phone number registered in the
phonebook is received, the name and the
number are displayed.
-Number-withheld calls are also memo-
rized in the system.
-International phone calls may not be made
depending on the type of cellular phone
you have.
CALLS CAN BE MADE USING
THE LATEST CALL HISTORY
ITEM
145
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the talk switch.
-“Call <name> <type>” is displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
-When “Call <name> <type>” on the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the
phonebook’s voice command recognition
cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth®
connection and if the contacts have been
transferred to the navigation system.
2Say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a registered contact.
-In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Call <name> <type>”, after
saying “Call” say the name, or the name
and type of phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or
“Call”, “Mary Davis”, “Mobile”
-There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Office and Other.
-Short or abbreviated names in the phone-
book may not be recognized. Change
names in the phonebook to full names.
-Sometimes a voice recognition result con-
firmation screen will be displayed. After
confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
-When the system recognizes multiple
names from the phonebook, a name can-
didate list will be displayed on the screen.
If the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of the
name from the candidate list (number 1
and number 2) to select a name from the
candidate list.
-When a contact has multiple phone num-
bers registered in the phonebook, a candi-
date list will be displayed. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the top
of the screen, say the number of the
desired phone number from the candidate
list (number 1 and number 2) to select a
phone number from the candidate list.
3Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
BY VOICE RECOGNITION
Calls can be made by giving a voice
command. (For the operation and
command of voice recognition, see
“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on
page 268.)
This can be operated while driving.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
CALL NAME
146
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the talk switch.
-“Dial <number>” is displayed in the “Short-
cut Menu” screen.
-When “Dial <number>” on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone num-
ber voice recognition cannot be used.
Check the Bluetooth® phone connection.
2Say the phone number.
-In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying
“Dial” say the phone number.
-Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
-The system can recognize the following
types of phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local
phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +
Local phone number)
-As the system cannot recognize additional
numbers, say the complete number with-
out stopping.
-When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candi-
date list will be displayed on the screen. If
the desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say the number
of the desired phone number from the
candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to
select a phone number from the candidate
list.
3Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
■INTERNATIONAL CALL
1Go to the “Main Menu” screen by
pressing the talk switch on the steering
wheel and saying “Main menu” or
touch “Main Menu”.
2Say “Use a phone”.
3Say “International call”.
-Up to 24 digits can be recognized when
using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple
groups and recognized.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
DIAL NUMBER To dial a phone number that is not a 3,
7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example
an international number, use “Interna-
tional Call”.
Calling without the voice recognition:
After the desired phone number is dis-
played, a call can also made by pressing
the switch on the steering wheel.
Canceling the voice recognition: The
voice recognition will be canceled when
either of the following is performed:
• Press and hold the talk switch.
• Touch “Cancel”.
147
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Messages”.
-When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be dis-
played. Touch “Yes”. (See page 170.)
2Touch the “SMS/MMS” tab and then
touch the desired received message
from the list.
-The tab display may vary depending on
the type of cellular phone.
3Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel.
CALLING USING AN
SMS/MMS MESSAGE
Calls can be made to an SMS (Short
Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia
Messaging Service) message sender’s
phone number.
This can be operated while driving.
BY POI CALL
A call can be made by touching
when it is displayed on the screen from
the navigation system. (See “TO SEE
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON
WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” on
page 35 and “VIEW DETAILED FUEL
PRICE INFORMATION” on page 292.)
148
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
1Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel to talk on the
phone.
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.
To refuse to receive the call: Touch
or press the switch on the
steering wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received
call: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the
“PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume
switch on the steering wheel.
INFORMATION
●During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
●The incoming call display mode can be
set. (See “INCOMING CALL DISPLAY”
on page 175.)
149
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
1Touch the desired number to input the
key.
While talking on the phone, this screen
is displayed. The operations outlined
below can be performed on this
screen.
To adjust the volume of the other par-
ty’s voice: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the
“PWR VOL” knob, or use the volume
switch on the steering wheel.
To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the switch on the steering
wheel.
To mute your voice: Touch “Mute”.
To input a key: Touch “0-9”.
To transfer the call: Touch “Handset
Mode” to change from hands-free call to
cellular phone call. Touch “Handsfree
Mode” to change from cellular phone
call to hands-free call.
INFORMATION
●Changing from hands-free call to cellular
phone call is not possible while driving.
●When cellular phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen
will be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
●Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
●Transferring methods and operations
will be different depending on the type of
cellular phone you have.
●For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”
INPUTTING A KEY
Inputting a key is not possible while
driving.
To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the switch on the steering
wheel.
150
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Confirm the number displayed on the
screen and touch “Send”. The number
before marked sign will be sent.
-When “Clear” is touched, this function is
finished and the normal tone screen
appears.
TONE SIGNAL
If a continuous tone signal is registered
in a phonebook, this screen appears.
(If not registered, “Send” and “Clear”
are not displayed.) This can be operat-
ed while driving.
To hang up the phone: Touch
or press the switch on the steering
wheel.
INFORMATION
●The continuous tone signal is the
marked sign (p or w) and the number
that follows the phone number. (e.g.
056133w0123p#1)
●When the “p” pause tone is used, after
waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until
the next pause tone will be automatically
sent. When the “w” pause tone is used,
the tone data up until the next pause
tone will be automatically sent after user
operation.
●This operation can be done when it is
desirable to operate an answering
machine or use a telephone service in a
bank for example. The phone number
and the code number in the phonebook
can be registered.
BY VOICE RECOGNITION
“Send Tones” can be operated by giv-
ing a command during a call.
-The operating procedure is similar to
other voice recognition operations. (For
the operation of voice recognition, see
“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on page
268.)
151
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch or press the
switch on the steering wheel to start
talking with the other party.
INCOMING CALL WAITING
When a call is interrupted by a third
party while talking, this screen is dis-
played.
-Touch or press the switch
on the steering wheel to refuse the call.
-Each time is touched or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who
is on hold will be switched.
INFORMATION
●If your cellular phone does not support
HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be
used.
●The ring tone that has been set in the
“Phone Sound Settings” screen sounds
when there is an incoming call. Depend-
ing on the type of Bluetooth® phone,
both the navigation system and
Bluetooth® phone may sound simulta-
neously when there is an incoming call.
(See “RING TONE SETTING” on page
156.)
152
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Messages”.
-Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be neces-
sary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
-When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be dis-
played. Touch “Yes”. (See page 170.)
3Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired message.
-Messages are displayed in the appropri-
ate connected Bluetooth® phone’s regis-
tered mail address folder. Touch the tab of
the desired folder to be displayed.
4Messages can be checked.
-Touching “Previous” or “Next” displays
the previous or next message.
-Only received messages on the con-
nected Bluetooth® phone can be dis-
played.
-The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.
5Touch “Play” to start reading out of the
message. Touch “Stop” to stop the
function.
-Touch “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR VOL”
knob, or use the volume switch on the
steering wheel to adjust the message read
out volume.
-The message read out function is avail-
able even while driving.
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the navigation system (Quick reply).
CHECKING MESSAGES
153
1. PHONE OPERATION
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Reply”.
2Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired message.
3Touch “Send”.
-While the message is being sent, a send-
ing message screen is displayed.
4This screen will be displayed if mes-
sage delivery fails.
-Touch “Retry” to attempt to send the
message again or touch “Cancel” to can-
cel.
-When the received message is an e-
mail and “Update Message Read Sta-
tus on Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark
as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be
selected. Touch “Mark as Unread” to
mark mails that have been read on the
Bluetooth® phone as unread. Con-
versely, touch “Mark as Read” to mark
mails that have not been read on the
Bluetooth® phone as read. (See “MES-
SAGE SETTINGS” on page 170.)
-For SMS/MMS, touching or
pressing the switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 147.)
-Touch “Reply” to reply to the message.
(See page 153.)
REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)
154
1. PHONE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Reply messages can be edited while
the vehicle is parked. Touch “Edit”.
2Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired message.
3Touch “OK” when editing is complet-
ed.
4Touch .
1Touch “Read” to check the message.
-The “Messages” screen will be displayed.
-When “Automatic Message Readout” is
set to “On”, the message will be automat-
ically read out. (See “MESSAGE SET-
TINGS” on page 170.)
EDITING REPLY MESSAGES NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
If “New Message Pop-up” and “New
Message Voice Notification” are set
to “On”, a notification appears on the
screen and a voice notification will be
heard when a new message arrives.
(See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page
170.)
-For SMS/MMS, touching or
pressing the switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 147.)
-To check the message later, touch
“Ignore” or .
155
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. SETUP
1. PHONE SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone”.
3Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1Touch “Phone Sound Settings”.
2Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
3When all settings are completed, touch
“Save”.
The phonebook can be edited. Vol-
ume, display and message settings
can also be changed.
PHONE SOUND SETTINGS
The call and ring tone volume can be
adjusted. A ring tone can be selected.
INFORMATION
●The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
156
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Call Volume” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
2Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the call vol-
ume.
3Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Ring Tone Volume” on the
“Phone Sound Settings” screen.
2Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tone
volume.
3Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Ring Tone” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
2Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired ring tone.
-Ring tones can be heard by touching the
screen buttons.
3Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Default” on the “Phone Sound
Settings” screen.
2Touch “Yes”.
CALL VOLUME SETTING
RING TONE VOLUME SETTING
RING TONE SETTING
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
157
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Phonebook”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Manage Contacts”.
5Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
PHONEBOOK
The call history can be deleted and
phonebook and speed dial settings
can be changed.
●Phonebook data is managed indepen-
dently for every registered phone. When
one phone is connected, another
phone’s registered data cannot be read.
SETTING THE PHONEBOOK
The phonebook can be transferred
from a Bluetooth® phone to the sys-
tem. The phonebook also can be add-
ed, edited and deleted.
158
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■THE “Contacts” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Options”.
4Touch “Manage Contacts”.
■TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUM-
BER
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones
1Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
2Touch “Update Contacts”.
The phone numbers in a Bluetooth®
phone can be transferred to the sys-
tem. The system can manage up to 5
phonebooks. Up to 1000 contacts
(maximum of 3 numbers per contact)
can be registered in each phonebook.
Operation methods differ between
PBAP compatible and PBAP incom-
patible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the phonebook
cannot be transferred.
159
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Transfer the phonebook data to the
system using a Bluetooth® phone.
-This operation may be unnecessary
depending on a cellular phone model.
-Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
-This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
-If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring phonebook data,
depending on the phone, the connected
Bluetooth® device may need to be discon-
nected.
PBAP compatible models automatic
data transfer setting
1Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
2Touch “Automatically Download
Contacts” to transfer the phonebook
from a connected cellular phone.
Touch “Automatically Download
Call History” to transfer the call histo-
ry from a connected cellular phone.
3Touch “On”.
4Touch “Save”.
When a PBAP compatible phone is con-
nected, the phone’s phonebook data can
be automatically transferred.
160
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-
patible Bluetooth® phones
1Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
2Touch “Replace Contacts” or “Add
Contacts”.
-If the phonebook contains phonebook
data, this screen is displayed.
3Transfer the phonebook data to the
system using a Bluetooth® phone.
-Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
-This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, touch “Cancel”. If
“Add Contacts” is touched and there is
an interruption during the transfer of data,
the phonebook data transferred until then
will be stored in the system. This is not the
case when “Cancel” is touched.
4When the transfer is complete, “Done”
will appear on the screen. Touch
“Done”.
When another Bluetooth® device is con-
nected
-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-
rently connected, this screen is displayed.
-To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
INFORMATION
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone, the registered image on the
phonebook may not appear when
phonebook data is transferred.
161
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
From “Contacts” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Transfer”.
4This screen is displayed. The following
operations are performed in the same
manner as when they are performed
from the “Setup” screen.
■REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA
1Touch “New Contact”.
2Use the software keyboard to input the
name and touch “OK”.
3Input the phone number and touch
“OK”.
-To use a tone signal after the phone num-
ber, input the tone signal too.
Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible but
OPP compatible phones can also be
transferred from the “Contacts” screen.
The phonebook data can be regis-
tered.
Up to 3 numbers per person can be
registered. New phonebook data can-
not be added for PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones.
162
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Touch the phone type.
5When 2 or less numbers in total are
registered to this contact, this screen is
displayed.
-To add a number to this contact, touch
“Yes”.
■EDITING THE PHONEBOOK DATA
1Touch “Edit Contacts”.
2Touch the desired data to edit.
3Touch the desired name or number.
4Edit the name or the number. (See
“REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA” on page 161.)
5Touch “Save” when editing is com-
pleted.
The phone number can be registered
in “Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and
“Phone # 3” separately. Phonebooks
cannot be edited for PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones via the navigation
system.
163
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
From the “Contact” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
4Touch “Options”.
5Touch “Edit”.
From the “Call History” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch the desired number from the list
on the “Call History” screen.
4Touch “Add to Contacts” or “Update
Contact”.
5If “Update Contact” has been
touched, this screen will be displayed.
Touch the desired data from the list.
164
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■DELETING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA
1Touch “Delete Contacts”.
2Touch the desired data or “Select
All”, then touch “Delete”.
-Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
3Touch “Yes”.
■ALTERNATIVE PHONEBOOK
DATA DELETION METHOD
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
4Touch “Options”.
5Touch “Delete”.
6Touch “Yes”.
The data can be deleted.
When selling or disposing of the vehi-
cle, delete all your data on the system.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the phonebook data after setting “Au-
tomatically Download Contacts” to
“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models
automatic data transfer setting” on
page 159.)
INFORMATION
●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted,
the phonebook data will be deleted at
the same time.
165
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.
5Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
■THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
From the “Speed Dial” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Options”.
From the “Contacts” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Options”.
4Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.
SPEED DIALS SETTING
Speed dials can be registered and de-
leted.
166
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL
1Touch “New”.
2Touch the desired data to be regis-
tered.
3Touch the desired phone number.
4Touch the desired speed dial location.
5If a location that is already in use is
touched, this screen will be displayed.
-Touch “Yes” to replace it.
6When this screen is displayed, the op-
eration is complete.
Speed dial numbers can be registered
by selecting the desired number from
the phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per
phone can be registered as a speed di-
al.
167
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BE
REGISTERED
From the “Speed Dial” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “(add new)”.
4Touch “Yes” to set new speed dial.
5Touch the desired data to be regis-
tered.
6Touch the desired phone number.
From the “Contact” screen
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
4Touch “Options”.
5Touch “Set Speed Dial”.
168
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6This screen is displayed.
-The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are per-
formed from the “Setup” screen.
■DELETING THE SPEED DIAL
1Touch “Delete”.
2Touch the desired data, or to delete all
the data touch “Select All”, then touch
“Delete”.
-Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
3Touch “Yes”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Delete Call History”.
5Touch the desired history be deleted.
The speed dial can be deleted.
DELETING CALL HISTORY
The call history can be deleted.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the call history after setting “Automat-
ically Download Call History” to
“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models
automatic data transfer setting” on
page 159.)
169
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6Touch the desired data, or to delete all
the data touch “Select All”, then touch
“Delete”.
-Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
7Touch “Yes”.
■THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSO BE
DELETED
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Delete”.
4This screen is displayed.
-The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are per-
formed from the “Setup” screen.
-Other call history can be operated simi-
larly.
Deleting after call history has been dis-
played
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch the desired history to be delet-
ed.
4Touch “Delete”.
5Touch “Yes”.
170
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Messaging Settings”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
5Touch “Save” when each setting is
completed.
1Press the button or the switch
on the steering wheel.
2Touch “Messages” on the “Phone”
screen.
3Touch “Options”.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:
MESSAGE SETTINGS
Message settings can be changed.
THE “Messaging Settings”
SCREEN CAN ALSO BE
DISPLAYED
SCREEN FOR “Messaging
Settings”
171
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.
1Touch “New Message Notification
Volume”.
2Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the new
message notification volume.
3Touch “OK”.
No. Function
Touch to set message forwarding
from cellular phones to “On” or
“Off”.
Touch to set the new message notifi-
cation display to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to set the new message voice
notification to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to adjust the new message no-
tification volume. (See “NEW MES-
SAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME
SETTINGS” on page 171.)
Touch to select a new message voice
notification tone. (See “NEW MES-
SAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SET-
TINGS” on page 172.)
Touch to set the automatic message
read out function to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to adjust the message read out
volume. (See “MESSAGE READ
OUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page
172.)
Touch to set the cellular phone’s mes-
sage read and unread status update
function to “On” or “Off”.
Touch to edit quick reply messages.
(See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MES-
SAGES” on page 173.)
INFORMATION
●Depending on the phone, these func-
tions may not be available.
NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION
VOLUME SETTINGS
The new message notification volume
can be adjusted.
No. Function
172
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “New Message Notification
Tone”.
2Touch the desired new message notifi-
cation tone.
-New message notification tones can be
heard by touching the screen buttons.
3Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Message Readout Volume”.
2Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the message
read out volume.
3Touch “OK”.
INFORMATION
●The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION
TONE SETTINGS
A new message voice notification tone
can be selected.
MESSAGE READ OUT VOLUME
SETTINGS
Message read out volume can be ad-
justed.
INFORMATION
●The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
173
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Edit Quick Reply Messag-
es”.
2Touch the screen button correspond-
ing to the desired message.
3Use the software keyboard to edit the
message.
4Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Default”.
2Touch “Yes”.
EDIT QUICK REPLY
MESSAGES
Quick reply messages can be edited.
15 messages have already been
stored.
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
174
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “Phone Display Settings”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
5When each setting is completed, touch
“Save”.
-On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:
-To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.
PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS
The phone display settings can be
changed.
SCREEN FOR “Phone Display
Settings”
No. Function
Touch to change the incoming call
display. (See “INCOMING CALL
DISPLAY” on page 175.)
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of the automatic
phonebook transfer completion
message to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of the automatic
call history transfer completion mes-
sage to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the display of images during
calls to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, touch
to set the orientation of images dis-
played during calls. (See “ROTAT-
ING CONTACT IMAGES” on page
176.)
175
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Incoming Call Display
Mode”.
2Touch “Full Screen” or “Drop
Down”.
3Touch “Save”.
●Depending on the phone, these func-
tions may not be available even if the
phone is PBAP compatible.
INCOMING CALL DISPLAY
The type of incoming call display can
be selected.
Screen button Function
“Full Screen”
When a call is received,
the hands-free screen is
displayed and it can be
operated on the screen.
“Drop Down”
The message is dis-
played on the upper side
of the screen and it can
only be operated via the
steering wheel switches.
176
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Rotate Contact Images”.
2Select the desired orientation of the im-
age to be displayed.
3Touch “Save”.
1Touch “Default”.
2Touch “Yes”.
ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES
For PBAP compatible models, when
“Contact Image for Incoming Calls”
is set to “On”, images stored together
with phone numbers in the cellular
phone’s phonebook will be transferred
and displayed during the incoming call.
The orientation of the image can be
set.
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
177
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Bluetooth*”.
3Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Registered Devices”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
A Bluetooth® device can be set up. REGISTERED DEVICES
A Bluetooth® device can be registered,
deleted or set up.
178
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Add New” to register a
Bluetooth® device to the system.
-If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to
be deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®
devices have already been registered” on
page 179.
2When this screen is displayed, operate
the Bluetooth® device.
-Search for the navigation system
displayed on the system’s screen using
your Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
-A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth® phone being
connected, a message confirming
registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth® phone according
to the confirmation message.
-To cancel the registration, touch
“Cancel”.
3When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed.
-When using the same device, it is not nec-
essary to register it again.
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
Bluetooth® devices compatible with
phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneous-
ly. Phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) (maximum of 5) can be regis-
tered.
179
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-
rently connected, this screen is displayed.
-To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-
ready been registered
1When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-
ready been registered, a registered de-
vice needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes”
to delete 1 or more.
2Touch the device to be deleted, then
touch “Remove”.
3Touch “Yes”.
1Touch “Remove”.
2Touch the desired device, or to delete
all the devices touch “Select All”, then
touch “Remove”.
-Multiple devices can be selected and
deleted at the same time.
3Touch “Yes”.
DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
INFORMATION
●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.
180
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“Device Name”: The name of the
Bluetooth® device which is displayed on
the screen. It can be changed to a desired
name.
• Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.
“Device Address”: The device address is
unique to each device. It cannot be
changed.
• If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-
tered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.
“My Phone Number”: The phone number
of the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on
the screen. Depending on the type of
phone, the phone number may not be dis-
played.
“Profiles”: The compatibility profile of the
Bluetooth® device is displayed on the
screen.
“Connect Portable Player from”: There
are 2 portable player connection settings
available; “Vehicle” and “Portable Play-
er”.
■CHANGING A DEVICE NAME
1Touch “Details”.
2Touch the device to be edited.
3Touch “Device Name”.
4Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and touch “OK”.
5Confirm the device name and touch
“OK”.
EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE
The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The
displayed information can also be edit-
ed.
181
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■SETTING PORTABLE PLAYER
CONNECTION METHOD
1Touch “Connect Portable Player
from”.
2Touch the desired connection method.
“Vehicle”: Touch to connect the audio
system to the portable player.
“Portable Player”: Touch to connect the
portable player to the audio system.
-Depending on the portable player, the
“Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connec-
tion method may be best. As such, refer to
the manual that comes with the portable
player.
3Touch “OK”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Connect Phone”.
4Touch the phone to be connected.
-The indicator of the selected Bluetooth®
phone will turn on.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
SELECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone has
been registered, it is necessary to se-
lect which phone to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 reg-
istered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)
Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phones
can be registered in the system, only 1
Bluetooth® phone can function at a
time.
182
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5This screen is displayed.
6When the result message is displayed,
the Bluetooth® phone can be used.
When a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing
-This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
When another Bluetooth® device is con-
nected
-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-
rently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
touch “Yes”.
-If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not
on the list, touch “Add New” to register
the phone. (See page 178.)
-The currently connected Bluetooth®
phone’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s
screen button is touched, the
Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected.
Touch “Yes” to disconnect.
183
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Connect Portable Player”.
4Touch the desired portable player to be
connected.
-The indicator of the selected portable
player will turn on.
5This screen is displayed.
6When the result message is displayed,
the portable player can be used.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
SELECTING PORTABLE
PLAYER
If more than 1 portable player has been
registered, it is necessary to select
which portable player to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 reg-
istered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)
Although up to 5 portable players can
be registered in the system, only 1 por-
table player can function at a time.
-If the desired portable player is not on
the list, touch “Add New” to register the
portable player. (See page 178.)
-The currently connected portable
player’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected portable player’s
screen button is touched, the portable
player can be disconnected. Touch
“Yes” to disconnect.
184
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
When another Bluetooth® device is con-
nected
-When another Bluetooth® device is cur-
rently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
3Touch “Detailed Bluetooth* Set-
tings”.
4This screen is displayed.
-The information displays the following
items:
-If it is desirable to change the settings,
refer to the following pages.
-When the settings have been changed,
touch “Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
DETAILED Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The Bluetooth® settings can be con-
firmed and changed.
Screen button/
Screen item Information
“Device Name”
This name will be dis-
played on the device
when it is connected. It
can be changed to a de-
sired name.
“Passcode”
The password that was
set when the Bluetooth®
device was registered
can be changed.
Device Address
The device address is
unique to each device. It
cannot be changed.
Profiles
The compatibility profile
of the Bluetooth® device
is displayed on the
screen. (See pages 132
and 242.)
185
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”:
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the “POWER” switch is in
ACCESSORY or ON mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”:
The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.
-The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection
state can be set on or off.
•“On”: The auto connection is turned on.
•“Off”: The auto connection is turned off.
-The auto connection state cannot be
changed from “On” to “Off” while driving,
but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.
1Touch “Bluetooth* Power”.
2Touch “On” or “Off”.
3Touch “Save”.
-In the event the state of “Bluetooth*
Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”,
Bluetooth® connection will begin.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
CHANGING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The Bluetooth® settings can be
changed according to the following
procedures.
The “Bluetooth* Power” display shows
the following state.
186
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■EDITING THE DEVICE NAME
1Touch “Device Name”.
2Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and touch “OK”.
3Touch “Save”.
■EDITING THE PASSCODE
1Touch “Passcode”.
2Input a passcode and touch “OK”.
3Touch “Save”.
187
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION
STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS
1Touch “Display Phone Status” or
“Display Portable Player Status”.
2Touch “On”.
3Touch “Save”.
1Touch “Default”.
2Touch “Yes”.
-If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is
changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®
connection will begin.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”
and the “POWER” switch is in
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the
Bluetooth® phone and portable
player’s connection status can be
displayed. (See “CHANGING
“Bluetooth* Power”” on page 185.)
INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
188
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................. 190
2. SOME BASICS............................ 192
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .............. 193
AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY....... 193
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND
OFF.................................................... 193
SWITCHING BETWEEN
FUNCTIONS...................................... 194
DSP CONTROL ................................... 195
TONE AND BALANCE ......................... 195
SELECTING SCREEN SIZE ................ 196
DVD PLAYER....................................... 197
AUX PORT ........................................... 198
USB PORT ........................................... 198
3. RADIO OPERATION ................... 199
LISTENING TO THE RADIO................ 199
PRESETTING A STATION .................. 199
SELECTING A STATION ..................... 200
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM ............................................ 200
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT .............. 201
4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
INFORMATION ......................... 202
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY .... 202
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY.................................. 203
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............. 204
1AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATION
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
5
5
189
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. RADIO OPERATION
(XM Satellite Radio
BROADCAST) ........................... 206
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM
Satellite Radio................................... 206
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID.............. 207
LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO ... 207
CHANNEL CATEGORY ...................... 208
PRESETTING A CHANNEL ................ 208
SELECTING A CHANNEL................... 208
DISPLAYING THE TITLE
AND NAME ....................................... 209
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
MALFUNCTIONS.............................. 210
6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET
RADIO BROADCAST)............... 212
LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO .... 212
7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION ........ 213
INSERTING A DISC ............................ 213
EJECTING A DISC.............................. 213
PLAYING A DISC ................................ 214
PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC ................. 214
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC ........... 216
OPERATING A DVD DISC.................. 219
PLAYING A DVD DISC ....................... 220
DVD OPTIONS.................................... 222
IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS..... 230
DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO
DISC INFORMATION ....................... 231
8. USB MEMORY OPERATION...... 233
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY........ 233
PLAYING A USB MEMORY ................ 234
9. iPod OPERATION....................... 238
CONNECTING iPod............................. 238
PLAYING iPod ..................................... 238
10. Bluetooth® AUDIO
OPERATION ............................. 242
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYER ............................................ 245
PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO............... 247
11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE
CONTROLS (STEERING
SWITCHES)............................... 252
12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS.................. 254
RADIO RECEPTION............................ 254
iPod...................................................... 255
USB MEMORY .................................... 256
CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND
DISC.................................................. 256
MP3/WMA FILES................................. 258
CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS .................. 260
TERMS ................................................ 260
1. AUDIO SETTINGS ...................... 264
HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS ....... 264
iPod SETTINGS................................... 265
2SETUP
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
190
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are
carried out on the screen. Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the
audio/video screen.
191
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
No. Name Function Page
Function menu tab Touch the desired radio or media mode screen
tab. 194
Function menu dis-
play screen
Touch to control the selected radio or media
mode. 194
“TUNE SCROLL”
knob
Turn to step up and step down the station band,
change to the next or previous satellite radio
channel, or skip to the next or previous track,
DVD chapter, etc. Also, the knob can be used to
enter selections on the track/file and album/folder
screens by pressing it.
199, 207,
214, 216,
220, 234,
238, 247
“SEEK/TRACK”
button
Press the “” or “” button to seek up or down
for a station or channel or to access a desired
track, file or chapter.
200, 208,
214, 216,
220, 234,
238, 247
“SETUP” button Press to display the “Setup” screen. 264
“MEDIA” button Press to display the media control screen. 193
“RADIO” button Press to display the radio control screen. 193
“ ·CLOSE”
button Press to insert or eject a disc. 197, 213
“PWR VOL” knob Press to turn the audio/video system on and off,
and turn to adjust the volume. 193
192
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the ba-
sic features of the audio/video system.
Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Your audio/video system works when
the “POWER” switch is turned to AC-
CESSORY or ON mode.
CAUTION
●For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning: Changes or modifications
in construction not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. Radio frequency expo-
sure. This device is approved for Mobile
Application only and, to comply with
applicable FCC radio frequency expo-
sure regulations, must be used with a
distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm)
between the antenna and the body of
any person at all time during use.
CAUTION
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to
make any changes yourself. This is an
intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to
retrieve information from the surface of
compact discs. The laser is carefully
shielded so that its rays remain inside
the cabinet. Therefore, never try to dis-
assemble the player or alter any of its
parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser. Use of
controls or adjustments or perfor-
mance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazard-
ous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/video
system on longer than necessary when
the hybrid system is not operating.
193
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to dis-
play screen buttons for the audio/video
system.
“PWR VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/
video system on and off. Turn this knob to
adjust the volume. The system turns on in
the last mode used.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
-For the operation of the voice command
system and its list of commands, see
pages 268 and 277.
AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN
DISPLAY
The audio split screen can be dis-
played while the map screen is dis-
played. For details, see page 39.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
-A function that enables automatic return
to the previous screen from the audio/
video screen can be selected. See page
43 for details.
194
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button is pressed, the audio control
mode changes.
“RADIO” button: To display the “AM”,
“FM”, “SAT” and “Apps” tabs on the
screen. (Radio mode)
“MEDIA” button: To display the “DISC”,
“BT Audio”, “AUX”, “USB” and “iPod”
tabs on the screen. (Media mode)
SWITCHING BETWEEN
FUNCTIONS
-Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on the
screen. Touch or , located
either side of the screen tabs, to display
tabs from the previous or next page.
-The desired audio mode can be found
by touching or and then
selecting that audio mode tab.
INFORMATION
●If a disc is not inserted, the DVD player
cannot be turned on.
●The DVD player can be turned off by
ejecting a disc.
●When radio or media mode is selected,
the respective screen buttons are dis-
played on the screen.
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-
ated.
●If the system does not respond to a
touch of a screen button, move your fin-
ger away from the screen and then
touch it again.
●Wipe off fingerprints using a glass clean-
ing cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners
to clean the screen.
195
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” but-
ton.
2Touch .
3Touch the “DSP” tab to display this
screen.
4Touch the desired items to be set.
5Touch “OK”.
1Touch “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
2Touch “ON” or “OFF”.
1Touch “Surround”.
2Touch “ON” or “OFF”.
DSP CONTROL
AUTOMATIC SOUND
LEVELIZER (ASL)
The system adjusts to the optimum vol-
ume and tone quality according to ve-
hicle speed to compensate for
increased vehicle noise.
SURROUND FUNCTION
This function can create a feeling of
presence.
TONE AND BALANCE
TONE
How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the
treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, dif-
ferent kinds of music and vocal pro-
grams usually sound better with
different mixes of treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE
A good balance of the left and right ste-
reo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, chang-
ing the right/left balance will increase
the volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
196
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch the “Sound” tab to display this
screen.
2Touch the desired screen button.
3Touch “OK”.
1Press the “MEDIA” button.
2Touch the “DISC” tab.
3Touch “Options”.
4Touch “Wide”.
5Touch the desired screen button.
Screen button Function
“Treble”
“+” or “-”
Touch to adjust high-
pitched tones.
“Mid”
“+” or “-”
Touch to adjust mid-
pitched tones.
“Bass”
“+” or “-”
Touch to adjust low-
pitched tones.
“Front” or “Rear”
Touch to adjust the
sound balance between
the front and rear
speakers.
“L” or “R”
Touch to adjust the
sound balance between
the left and right speak-
ers.
INFORMATION
●The tone of each mode (such as AM,
FM and DVD player) can be adjusted.
SELECTING SCREEN SIZE
Before selecting screen size, it is nec-
essary to insert a DVD disc and select
DISC mode.
197
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
6Touch “Save”.
1When inserting a disc, press the
“ ·CLOSE” button and gently insert
the disc with the label facing up.
No. Function
Touch to display a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black.
Touch to widen the 3 : 4 screen hor-
izontally to fill the screen.
Touch to widen the 3 : 4 screen ver-
tically and horizontally, by the same
ratio, to fill the screen.
DVD PLAYER
NOTICE
●Never try to disassemble or oil any part
of the DVD player. Do not insert any-
thing other than a disc into the slot.
INFORMATION
●The player is intended for use with 4.7
in. (12 cm) discs only.
198
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “MEDIA” button to display
the media control screen and touch the
“AUX” tab or press the “MEDIA” but-
ton repeatedly to change to AUX
mode.
1Press the “MEDIA” button to display
the media control screen and touch the
“USB” or “iPod” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly to change
to USB memory/iPod mode.
AUX PORT
The sound of portable audio players
connected to the AUX port can be en-
joyed. For details, refer to “Owner’s
Manual”.
CAUTION
●Do not connect portable audio device or
operate the controls while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not leave portable audio device in
the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in
damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unneces-
sary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected as this may
damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable audio
device or its terminal.
INFORMATION
●When the portable audio player is not
connected to the AUX port, the tab will
be dimmed.
USB PORT
A USB memory/iPod can be connect-
ed to the USB port. For details, see
“CONNECTING A USB MEMORY” on
page 233 and “CONNECTING iPod”
on page 238.
INFORMATION
●When a USB memory/iPod is not con-
nected with the USB port, the tab will be
dimmed.
199
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. RADIO OPERATION
1Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.
2Touch the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or
“Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” but-
ton repeatedly to select the desired
tab.
1Turn the knob clockwise to step up the
station band or counterclockwise to
step down.
1Tune in the desired station.
2Touch one of the left side screen but-
tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is
heard. This sets the frequency to the
screen button. The station’s frequency
will be displayed in the screen button.
-To change the preset station to a different
one, follow the same procedure.
LISTENING TO THE RADIO
SELECTING A RADIO STATION
STEP UP AND DOWN THE
STATION BAND
INFORMATION
●The radio automatically changes to ste-
reo reception when a stereo broadcast
is received.
PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,
which can store up to 36 stations (6
stations per page x 6 pages) from any
of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
200
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Preset tuning: Touch one of the mix pre-
set channels on the left side of the screen
to select the desired station. The screen
button is highlighted and the station fre-
quency appears on the screen.
Seek tuning: Press the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop when a
station is found. Each time the button is
pressed, the stations will be searched au-
tomatically one after another.
To scan all the frequencies: Touch
“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on the
screen. The radio will find the next station
and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or
“HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if
“Analog” is selected, and then scan
again. To stay tuned to a station and stop
the scanning, touch “SCAN” again. (To
set HD Radio™ system, see page 264.)
1Touch “Options”.
SELECTING A STATION
Tune in the desired station using one
of the following methods.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Ra-
dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to
be received from radio stations that uti-
lize RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular
program type,
— display messages from radio sta-
tions,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RBDS features are available only
when listening to an FM station that
broadcasts RBDS information and the
“FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE
201
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2Touch “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to
move forward and backward through
the program list.
-Once a program type has been set,
“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.
-The program list is in the following order:
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
•News
•Oldies
•Other
•Pop Music
• Religion
•Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
•Sports
•Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio
Settings” are set to analog.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
3Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the system
will start to seek for stations in the rele-
vant program type.
“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic program
station. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on the
screen.
●If no relevant program can be found, “no
type” will appear on the screen.
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
A station that regularly broadcasts traf-
fic information is automatically located.
INFORMATION
●If no traffic program station is found, “No
Traffic” will appear on the screen.
●If a traffic program station is found, the
name of the traffic program station will
be displayed for a while.
202
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION
1Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.
2Touch the “AM” or “FM” tab or press
the “RADIO” button repeatedly to se-
lect the desired tab.
-As a user works through the analog radio
stations, (where applicable) the radio
receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 10
seconds.
-An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be dis-
played on the screen when in digital. The
“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color
indicating the station is indeed (an analog
and) a digital station. Once the digital sig-
nal is acquired, the logo will change to a
bright orange color.
-The song title, artist name and music
genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.
3This screen will be displayed if
“Options” is touched.
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog
broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available
radio stations and programming, refer
to www.hdradio.com.
USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
203
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When “Text” is touched, information such
as the artist name, song title, album title
and music genre of the track being lis-
tened to are displayed on the text screen.
To display messages from the station,
touch “Additional Information”.
-When “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” is
touched, a program type will be searched.
Once a program type has been set,
“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.
(See “SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE” on
page 200.)
1Touch “Multicast”.
-Each time “Multicast” is touched, the
supplemental program changes.
-If “Multicast” is touched when tuned to
the last of the supplemental programs, the
main program will be returned to.
1Touch “Tag” to bookmark the music
information.
2Open the cover and connect iPod us-
ing an iPod cable.
-Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
-Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
-When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio
can be viewed. Then a user may decide to
purchase the song or CD/Album which
had been listened to on their radio.
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemen-
tal programs on one FM station.
TAG
INFORMATION
●If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs,
tag the information again.
●HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
204
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time align-
ment- a user may hear a
short period of program-
ming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the sta-
tion is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in
and out.
Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Touching “Analog” can force ra-
dio in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition when
an HD2/HD3 multicast
channel had been playing.
The radio does not have
access to digital signals at
the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when se-
lecting an HD2/HD3 multi-
cast channel preset.
The digital multicast con-
tent is not available until
HD Radio™ broadcast can
be decoded and make the
audio available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for
the audio to become available.
Text information does not
match the present song au-
dio.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shown
for the present selected fre-
quency.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.
205
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
206
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST)
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast
in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-
signed exclusively to receive broad-
casts provided under a separate
subscription. Availability is limited to
the 48 contiguous U.S. states and
some Canadian provinces.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite
broadcast programming in the vehicle.
Additional activation and service sub-
scription fees apply that are not includ-
ed in the purchase price of the vehicle
and digital satellite tuner.
-For complete information on subscrip-
tion rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:
U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079.
INFORMATION
●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and con-
ditions of the XM Satellite Radio cus-
tomer service agreement.
●Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tun-
ing to “CH 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
●All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.
SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are
awarded Type Approval Certificates
from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of
compatibility with the services offered
by XM Satellite Radio.
207
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-If “CH 000” is selected using the
“TUNE SCROLL” knob, the ID code,
which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will
be displayed. If another channel is
selected, the ID code will no longer be dis-
played. The channel (000) alternates
between displaying the radio ID and the
specific radio code.
1Press the “RADIO” button to display
the radio control screen.
2Touch the “SAT” tab or press the
“RADIO” button repeatedly until the
“SAT” tab is selected to choose a sat-
ellite broadcast channel.
3Turn the “TUNE SCROLL” knob to se-
lect the next or previous channel.
-Turning the knob quickly allows rapid
scrolling through the channel list.
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is re-
quired when activating an XM service
or when reporting a problem.
LISTENING TO SATELLITE
RADIO
208
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE”
to go to the next or previous category.
1Tune in the desired channel. Make
sure the desired channel is received.
2Touch one of the left side screen but-
tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is
heard. This sets the frequency to the
screen button. The channel number
will be displayed in the screen button.
-To change the preset channel to a differ-
ent one, follow the same procedure.
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selector
screen button (1-6) to listen to the desired
channel. The selected screen button (1-6)
is highlighted and its related information
appears on the right side of the screen.
To select a channel within the current
category: Press the “” or “” button of
“SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will change up
or down to a channel within the current
channel category.
To scan the currently selected channel
category: Touch “SCAN”. “SCAN” ap-
pears on the screen. The radio will find the
next channel in the same channel catego-
ry, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a channel, touch
“SCAN” again.
CHANNEL CATEGORY
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
SELECTING A CHANNEL
Tune in the desired channel using one
of the following methods.
209
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Text” to display the artist
name and song title currently being lis-
tening to.
DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND
NAME
●Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can
be displayed. (Some information will not
be fully displayed.)
210
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Re-
ferring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective ac-
tion.
Message Explanation
Ck Antenna
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-
ble. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
Ch Unauth
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or
“CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another chan-
nel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-
hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-
lect another channel.
----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.
Ch Unavail
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2
seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
INFORMATION
●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-0079
(Canada).
211
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
●This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
●If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television recep-
tion, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
●Information to user
• Alternation or modifications carried
out without appropriate authorization
may invalidate the user’s right to
operate the equipment.
INFORMATION
●This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”
(Music and Talk) of only XM Satellite
Radio and “Text Information*” linked to
the respective “Audio Services”.
*: Text Information includes, Station
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.
212
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)
1Press the “RADIO” button.
2Touch the “Apps” tab on the screen or
press the “RADIO” button repeatedly
until the “Apps” tab is selected.
-If a compatible phone is already regis-
tered, it will be connected automatically.
-If a compatible phone has not been regis-
tered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot
be completed correctly, touch “Connect”
to register and/or connect your phone.
(See page 177.)
-When connection is complete, the applica-
tion screen can be displayed.
3Touch “View Application Screen”.
-The internet radio application screen is
displayed.
-Perform operations according to the dis-
played application screen.
-By pressing the “RADIO” button, the
“Audio” screen can be returned to.
*: For details, refer to http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/ or call 1-800-
331-4331. Some internet radio has to be
linked to your account in Toyota website
before using it in the vehicle.
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO
One of Entune’s features is the ability
to listen to internet radio. In order to
use this service, an Entune compatible
phone and the navigation system
needs to be set. For details, refer to the
“ENTUNE SERVICE” section. (See
page 304.)
INFORMATION
●Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
●An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Entune
by connecting via USB. The system
uses the connection method that was
used last. Therefore, if connected via
USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is
necessary to reconnect the iPhone via
Bluetooth®.
●Services requiring a separate contract
can also be used.*
●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering
wheel.
●If internet radio has never been listened
to by activating “Apps” from the “Infor-
mation” screen, the “Apps” tab will be
dimmed.
213
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION
1Press the “ ·CLOSE” button to slide
the display down.
-The display will slide down, opening the
DVD slot.
2Insert a disc into the disc slot.
-After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.
3Press the “ ·CLOSE” button.
-The display will slide up, closing the DVD
slot.
-Touching “Disc” ejects the currently
inserted disc.
1Press the “ ·CLOSE” button to slide
the display down.
-When the “·CLOSE” button is pressed,
the disc will be automatically ejected.
2Press the “ ·CLOSE” button to close
the display.
For safety reasons, the DVD video
discs can only be viewed when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
(a)The vehicle is completely stopped.
(b)The “POWER” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode.
(c)The parking brake is applied.
While driving in DVD video mode, only
the DVD’s audio can be heard.
INSERTING A DISC
EJECTING A DISC
214
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has
already been loaded in the disc slot.
2Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
1Touch the “DISC” tab.
-When CD-TEXT information exists, the
name and artist of the CD currently being
listened to will be displayed.
: Touch to pause the track.
: Touch to resume playing the track.
■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
CAUTION
●Do not place anything on the opened
display, as such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
●To reduce the chance of injury in case of
an accident or sudden stop while driv-
ing, keep the display closed.
●Take care not to jam your hand while the
display is moving. Otherwise, you could
be injured.
NOTICE
●Do not obstruct the display while it is
moving. It could damage your audio sys-
tem.
INFORMATION
●Under extremely cold conditions, the
screen may react slowly or operation
sound may become louder.
●If a disc is inserted with the label facing
down, it cannot be played.
PLAYING A DISC
PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
215
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1Touch the track name screen button to
display the CD’s track list.
2Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the disc.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
■REPEATING A TRACK
1Touch “RPT” while the track is play-
ing.
-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automati-
cally play it again. To cancel this function,
touch “RPT” again.
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
216
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
DISC IN RANDOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” while the disc is play-
ing.
-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
disc currently being listened to. To cancel
this function, touch “RAND” again.
1Touch the “DISC” tab.
-The file name, folder name and artist
name currently being listened to and the
disc icon are displayed on the screen.
: Touch to pause the file.
: Touch to resume playing the file.
■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
, : Touch to skip to the next or previ-
ous folder.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
INFORMATION
●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of
the disc and track will be displayed. Up
to 32 characters can be displayed.
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER
217
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN
1Touch the folder name screen button
to display the following folder list
screen.
2Touch the desired folder number to
display the folder’s file list. From the file
list, select the desired file number.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 folder groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the folder list. To select
the desired folder, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected file from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file.
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE
218
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN
1Touch the file name screen button to
display the following file list screen.
2Touch the desired file number. The
player will start playing the selected file
from the beginning.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 file groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the file list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file list. To select the
desired file, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
■REPEATING A FILE
1Touch “RPT” while the file is playing.
REPEATING
The file or folder currently being lis-
tened to can be repeated.
219
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
When “RAND” is off
• File Repeat Folder Repeat Off
When “RAND” is on
• File RepeatOff
-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the
file is finished, the player will automatically
play it again. To cancel this function, touch
“RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode
turns off.
■REPEATING A FOLDER
1Touch “RPT” repeatedly until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
-When the folder is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the folder and play it again. To cancel this
function, touch “RPT” again.
■PLAYING FILES FROM ONE FOLD-
ER IN RANDOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” while the disc is play-
ing.
-Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder Random)
Folder Random (1 Disc Random) Off
-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file randomly from the
folder currently being listened to. To can-
cel this function, touch “RAND” repeat-
edly until the random mode turns off.
■PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THE
FOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RAN-
DOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.
-Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects a file randomly
from all of the existing folders. To cancel
this function, touch “RAND” again.
RANDOM ORDER
Files or folders can be automatically
and randomly selected.
INFORMATION
●When a file is skipped or the system is
inoperative, touch “RAND” to reset.
OPERATING A DVD DISC
The playback condition of some DVD
discs may be determined by the DVD
software producer. This DVD player
plays a disc as the software producer
intended. As such some functions may
not work properly. Be sure to read the
instruction manual that comes with the
individual DVD disc. For detailed infor-
mation about DVD video discs, see
“DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO
DISC INFORMATION” on page 231.
220
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “MEDIA” button.
2Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
-Touch “Options” on the “DVD” screen,
then touch “Wide” on the “DVD Options”
screen. The screen mode can be
changed.
-If “Full Screen” is touched when the vehi-
cle is completely stopped and the parking
brake is applied, the video screen returns.
-If is touched, while watching a DVD,
the DVD controls will appear.
PRECAUTIONS ON DVD VIDEO
DISC
When recording with a DVD video, au-
dio tracks may not record in some cas-
es while the menu is displayed. As
audio will not play in this case, verify
that the video tracks are playing and
then activate playback.
When playback of a disc is completed:
If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc is
playing, the first track or file starts.
If a DVD video is playing, playback will
stop or the menu screen will be dis-
played.
The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while
playing back certain DVD video discs.
CAUTION
●Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to empha-
size the impact of sound effects. If you
adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum
volume level that the DVD will play, you
may be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different audio
source. The louder sounds may have a
significant impact on the human body or
pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.
PLAYING A DVD DISC
DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLS
INFORMATION
●If appears on the screen when a con-
trol is touched, the operation relevant to
the control is not permitted.
221
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■CHANGING A CHAPTER
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” or turn the
“TUNE SCROLL” knob to change the
chapter.
1Select the menu item using ,
, or and touch
“Enter”. The player starts playing the
disc from the start of the selected item.
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO
CONTROLS
Screen button Function
“Top Menu”,
“Menu”
Touch to display the menu
screen for DVD video.
The menu control key ap-
pears on the screen. (See
page 221.)
Touch to pause the video
screen.
Touch to rewind during
playback.
Touch to stop the video
screen.
Touch to resume normal
play during pause.
Touch to fast forward dur-
ing playback and forward
frame by frame during
pause.
SELECTING A MENU ITEM
INFORMATION
●According to the DVD disc, some menu
items can be selected directly. (For
details, see the manual that comes with
the DVD disc provided separately.)
222
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “MEDIA” button.
2Touch the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
3Touch “Options”.
4This screen is displayed.
DVD OPTIONS No. Function
Touch to display the title search
screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the predetermined
scene on the screen and start play-
ing.
Touch to display the audio selection
screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the subtitle selec-
tion screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the angle selection
screen. (See page 223.)
Touch to display the screen mode
screen. (See page 196.)
Touch to display the image quality
adjustment screen. (See page 224.)
Touch to display the initial setup
screen. (See page 225.)
223
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Search” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2Enter the title number and touch “OK”.
-The player starts playing video for that title
number.
-If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
1Touch “Audio” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2Each time “Change” is touched, the
audio language is changed.
-The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
1Touch “Subtitle” on the “DVD Op-
tions” screen.
2Each time “Change” is touched, the
language the subtitles are displayed in
is changed.
-The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
-When “Hide” is touched, the subtitles can
be hidden.
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
1Touch “Angle” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2Each time “Change” is touched, the
angle is changed.
SEARCHING BY TITLE
CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE
CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
CHANGING THE ANGLE
The angle can be selected for discs
that are multi-angle compatible when
the angle mark appears on the screen.
224
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-The angles available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
-When is touched, the previous
screen is displayed.
■CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR
AND TONE ADJUSTMENT
1Touch “Display” on the “DVD Op-
tions” screen.
2Touch “” or “” to display the de-
sired item to be adjusted.
3After adjusting the screen, touch
“OK”.
-The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
touched. To turn the screen back on,
press any button. The selected screen
appears.
AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The brightness, contrast, color and
tone of the screen can be adjusted. In
addition, the display can be turned off
and the screen can be changed to ei-
ther day or night mode.
Screen button Function
“Contrast” “+” Touch to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
“Contrast” “-” Touch to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
“Brightness” “+” Touch to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-” Touch to darken the
screen.
“Color” “R” Touch to strengthen the
red color of the screen.
“Color” “G”
Touch to strengthen the
green color of the
screen.
“Tone” “+” Touch to strengthen the
tone of the screen.
“Tone” “-” Touch to weaken the
tone of the screen.
225
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “DVD Settings” on the “DVD
Options” screen.
2Touch the items to be set.
3After the initial setting has been
changed, touch “Save”.
-This screen will close, and the system will
return to the previous screen.
-When “Default” is touched, all menus are
initialized.
■AUDIO LANGUAGE
1Touch “Audio Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2Touch the desired language to be
heard on the “Audio Language”
screen.
-If the desired language to be heard cannot
be found on this screen, touch “Other”
and enter a language code. For entry of a
language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/
SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 227.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
1Touch “Subtitle Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2Touch the desired language to be read
on the “Subtitle Language” screen.
-If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, touch “Other”
and enter a language code. For entry of a
language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/
SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 227.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
DVD SETTINGS
The audio language can be changed.
The subtitle language can be changed.
226
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■MENU LANGUAGE
1Touch “Menu Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2Touch the desired language to be read
on the “Menu Language” screen.
-If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, touch “Other”
and enter a language code. For entry of a
language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/
SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 227.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■ANGLE MARK
1Touch “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Set-
tings” screen.
2Touch “On” or “Off”.
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■PARENTAL LOCK
1Touch “Parental Lock” on the “DVD
Settings” screen.
2Enter the 4-digit personal code on the
“Key Code” screen.
-If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
3Touch a parental level (1-8) on the “Se-
lect Restriction Level” screen.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
4Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■AUTO START PLAYBACK
1Touch “Auto Start Playback” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2Touch “On” or “Off”.
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
The language on the DVD video menu
can be changed.
The multi-angle mark can be turned on
or off on the screen while discs that are
multi-angle compatible are being
played.
The level of viewer restrictions can be
changed.
Discs that are inserted while the vehi-
cle is in motion will automatically start
playing. Certain discs may not play.
227
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE
1Touch “Sound Dynamic Range” on
the “DVD Settings” screen.
2Touch “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
1Enter the 4-digit language code.
-If the wrong numbers are entered, touch
to delete the numbers.
-To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
touch .
2Touch “OK”.
3Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
The difference between the lowest vol-
ume and the highest volume can be
adjusted.
ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/
MENU LANGUAGE CODE
If “Other” on the “Audio Language”
screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or
“Menu Language” screen is touched,
the desired language to be heard or
read can be selected by entering a
language code.
228
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Code Language
0514 English
1001 Japanese
0618 French
0405 German
0920 Italian
0519 Spanish
2608 Chinese
1412 Dutch
1620 Portuguese
1922 Swedish
1821 Russian
1115 Korean
0512 Greek
0101 Afar
0102 Abkhazian
0106 Afrikaans
0113 Amharic
0118 Arabic
0119 Assamese
0125 Aymara
0126 Azerbaijani
0201 Bashkir
0205 Byelorussian
0207 Bulgarian
0208 Bihari
0209 Bislama
0214 Bengali, Bangla
0215 Tibetan
0218 Breton
0301 Catalan
0315 Corsican
0319 Czech
0325 Welsh
0401 Danish
0426 Bhutani
0515 Esperanto
0520 Estonian
0521 Basque
0601 Persian
0609 Finnish
0610 Fiji
0615 Faroese
0625 Frisian
0701 Irish
0704 Scottish-Gaelic
0712 Galician
0714 Guarani
0721 Gujarati
0801 Hausa
0809 Hindi
0818 Croatian
0821 Hungarian
0825 Armenian
0901 Interlingua
0905 Interlingue
0911 Inupiak
0914 Indonesian
0919 Icelandic
Code Language
229
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
0923 Hebrew
1009 Yiddish
1023 Javanese
1101 Georgian
1111 Kazakh
1112 Greenlandic
1113 Cambodian
1114 Kannada
1119 Kashmiri
1121 Kurdish
1125 Kirghiz
1201 Latin
1214 Lingala
1215 Laotian
1220 Lithuanian
1222 Latvian, Lettish
1307 Malagasy
1309 Maori
1311 Macedonian
1312 Malayalam
1314 Mongolian
1315 Moldavian
1318 Marathi
1319 Malay
1320 Maltese
1325 Burmese
1401 Nauru
1405 Nepali
1415 Norwegian
Code Language
1503 Occitan
1513 (Afan) Oromo
1518 Oriya
1601 Panjabi
1612 Polish
1619 Pashto, Pushto
1721 Quechua
1813 Rhaeto-Romance
1814 Kirundi
1815 Romanian
1823 Kinyarwanda
1901 Sanskrit
1904 Sindhi
1907 Sango
1908 Serbo-Croatian
1909 Sinhalese
1911 Slovak
1912 Slovenian
1913 Samoan
1914 Shona
1915 Somali
1917 Albanian
1918 Serbian
1919 Siswati
1920 Sesotho
1921 Sundanese
1923 Swahili
2001 Tamil
2005 Telugu
Code Language
230
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
If “Check DISC” appears on the screen:
It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged,
or it was inserted upside down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly. If a disc which is
not playable is inserted, “Check DISC” will
also appear on the screen. For appropriate
discs for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO
SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS” on page
254.
If “Region code error” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the DVD region
code is not set properly.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
2007 Tajik
2008 Thai
2009 Tigrinya
2011 Turkmen
2012 Tagalog
2014 Setswana
2015 Tongan
2018 Turkish
2019 Tsonga
2020 Tatar
2023 Twi
2111 Ukrainian
2118 Urdu
2126 Uzbek
2209 Vietnamese
2215 Volapük
2315 Wolof
2408 Xhosa
2515 Yoruba
2621 Zulu
Code Language IF THE PLAYER
MALFUNCTIONS
If the player or another unit equipped
with the player malfunctions, the audio/
video system will display a message.
These are described below.
INFORMATION
●If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files only, the CD-DA files can be played.
If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files and files other than CD-DA files,
only MP3/WMA files can be played.
231
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating which coun-
tries the DVD video disc can be played in
on this DVD player. If the DVD video disc
is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot
use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to
play an inappropriate DVD video disc on
this player, “Region code error” appears
on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, there are
cases when it cannot be used.
■MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO
DISCS
DVD PLAYER AND DVD
VIDEO DISC INFORMATION
DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC/
PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs
conforming to another format such as
SECAM cannot be used.
NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PAL
format of color TV.
Indicates the number
of audio tracks.
Indicates the number
of language subtitles.
Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates a region
code by which this vid-
eo disc can be played.
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
232
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-
dards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on
average and stored. Variable rate encoded
technology in which the volume of data as-
signed to the picture is changed depend-
ing on the picture format has also been
adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM
and Dolby Digital, which enables higher
quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle
and multi-language features will also help
users enjoy the more advanced technolo-
gy of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with a
level of restrictions of the country. The lev-
el of restrictions varies depending on the
DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs
cannot be played at all, or violent scenes
are skipped or replaced with other scenes.
• Level 1: DVD video discs for children
can be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children
and G-rated movie can be played.
• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs
can be played.
Multi-angle feature: The same scene can
be enjoyed from different angles.
Multi-language feature: The subtitle and
audio language can be selected.
Region codes: The region codes are pro-
vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If
the DVD video disc does not have the
same region code as the DVD player, you
cannot play the disc on the DVD player.
For region codes, see page 231.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-
mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-
grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-
ed into parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and au-
dio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one au-
dio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A
title comprises of several chapters.
DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
-Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labora-
tories.
-This Item Incorporates copy protection
technology that is protected by U.S. pat-
ents and other intellectual property
rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse
engineering and disassembly are pro-
hibited.
233
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
8. USB MEMORY OPERATION
1Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
-Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
2Press the “MEDIA” button.
Connecting a USB memory enables
users to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
●Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the USB memory while driving.
●Do not leave your portable player in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the por-
table player.
●Do not push down on or apply unneces-
sary pressure to the portable player
while it is connected as this may dam-
age the portable player or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable player
or its terminal.
CONNECTING A USB
MEMORY
234
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1If a USB memory has already been
connected, touch the “USB” tab to se-
lect USB mode. Pressing the “MEDIA”
button repeatedly can also select the
tab.
Tag mode
Folder mode
: Touch to start playing the music.
: Touch to pause the music.
-To start playing the music again, touch
.
■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN
, : Touch to skip to the next or previ-
ous folder/album.
PLAYING A USB MEMORY
PLAYING AND PAUSING A USB
MEMORY
INFORMATION
●If tag information exists, the file/folder
names will be changed to track/album
names.
INFORMATION
●When the USB memory is connected
and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory will
start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed
and reinserted (and the contents have
not been changed), the USB memory
will resume playing from the same point
it was last used.
●Depending on the USB memory that is
connected to the system, certain func-
tions may not be available.
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER/ALBUM
235
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch the folder/album name screen
button.
2Touch the desired tab and select the
desired folder, artist or album.
-Character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF”
etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that
begin with the same letter as the character
button.
Each time the same character screen but-
ton is touched, the list starting with the
subsequent character is displayed.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 folder/artist/album groups. If either of
these screen buttons is touched when the
top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■ON THE USB TOP SCREEN
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file/track number appears
on the screen. The player will start playing
the selected file/track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file/track.
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/
TRACK
236
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE FILE/TRACK LIST SCREEN
1Touch the file/track name screen but-
ton to display the following file/track list
screen.
2Touch the desired file/track number.
The player will start playing the select-
ed file/track from the beginning.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 file/track groups. If either of these
screen buttons is touched when the top/
bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the file/track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file/track list. To se-
lect the desired file/track, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the file/track.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
237
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■REPEATING A FILE/TRACK
1Touch “RPT” while the file or track is
playing.
-Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
When “RAND” is off
• File/Track Repeat Folder/Album
Repeat Off
When “RAND” is on
• File/Track Repeat Off
-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the
file/track is finished, the player will auto-
matically play it again. To cancel this func-
tion, touch “RPT” repeatedly until the
repeat mode turns off.
■REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM
1Touch “RPT” repeatedly until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
-When the folder/album is finished, the
player will automatically go back to the
beginning of the folder/album and play it
again. To cancel this function, touch
“RPT” again.
■PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RAN-
DOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” while the file or track is
playing.
-Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder/Album Random)
Folder/Album Random (All Folder/Album
Random) Off
-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file/track randomly from
the folder/album currently being listened
to. To cancel this function, touch “RAND”
repeatedly until the random mode turns
off.
■ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOM
PLAY
1Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.
-Once “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears
on the screen, the system selects a file
randomly from all of the existing folders or
albums. To cancel this function, touch
“RAND” again.
REPEATING
The file or folder currently being lis-
tened to can be repeated.
RANDOM ORDER
Files or folders can be automatically
and randomly selected.
238
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
9. iPod OPERATION
1Open the cover and connect iPod us-
ing an iPod cable.
-Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
2Press the “MEDIA” button.
1If an iPod has already been connected,
touch the “iPod” tab to display the
screen. Pressing the “MEDIA” button
repeatedly can also select the tab.
: Touch to start playing the music.
: Touch to pause the music.
-To start playing the music again, touch
.
Connecting an iPod enables users to
enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the iPod while driving.
NOTICE
●Do not leave your portable player in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the por-
table player.
●Do not push down on or apply unneces-
sary pressure to the portable player
while it is connected as this may dam-
age the portable player or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable player
or its terminal.
INFORMATION
●When an iPod is connected using a gen-
uine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging
its battery.
CONNECTING iPod
PLAYING iPod
PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod
239
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Browse”.
2Select the desired play mode.
■ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
●When the iPod connected to the system
includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by touching “Video”
on the “iPod” screen.
●Depending on the iPod, the video sound
may not be able to be heard.
●Depending on the iPod and the songs in
the iPod, iPod cover art may be dis-
played. This function can be changed to
“On” or “Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS”
on page 265. It may take time to display
iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be
operated while the cover art display is in
process. Only the iPod cover art that is
saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
●When an iPod is connected and the
audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
same point it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected
to the system, certain functions may not
be available.
SELECTING A PLAY MODE
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
240
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1Touch the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.
2Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the player.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
1Touch “RPT” while the track is play-
ing.
-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automati-
cally play it again. To cancel this function,
touch “RPT” again.
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to
can be repeated.
241
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOM
ORDER
1Touch “RAND” while the track is play-
ing.
-Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Track Shuffle Album Shuffle Off
-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from all
of the existing albums on the iPod. To can-
cel this function, touch “RAND” twice.
■PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOM
ORDER
1Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
-Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects an album ran-
domly from all of the existing albums on
the iPod. To cancel this function, touch
“RAND” again.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
242
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth® audio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the ve-
hicle speakers via wireless communi-
cation.
This audio system supports
Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio
music without cables. If your portable
player does not support Bluetooth®,
the Bluetooth® audio system will not
function.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect to the Bluetooth® audio system
while driving.
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-
makers or cardiac defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® anten-
nas. The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio
waves could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
●Do not leave your portable player in the
vehicle. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the por-
table player.
243
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
The quality of the Bluetooth® connection
is indicated as follows:
: An excellent connection to
Bluetooth®.
: Indicates a bad connection to
Bluetooth®, resulting in possible
deterioration of audio quality.
: No connection to Bluetooth®.
Indicates the amount of battery charge
left.
●In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The portable player is turned off.
• The portable player is not connected.
• The portable player has a low battery.
●It may take time to connect the phone
when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
●Portable players must correspond to the
following specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem. However, some functions may be
limited depending on the type of porta-
ble player. Also, the different screen is
displayed depending on which portable
player is connecting.
• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
•Profile
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)
●Refer to http://www.Toyota.com/
Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
devices for this system.
Empty Full
244
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
U.S.A.
INFORMATION
●Remaining charge is not displayed while
the Bluetooth® device is connecting.
●The amount of charge left does not
always correspond correctly with your
portable player.
●This system does not have a charging
function.
●An antenna for Bluetooth® connection is
built into the instrument panel. The con-
dition of the Bluetooth® connection may
not be good and the system may not
function when using a Bluetooth® porta-
ble player in the following conditions:
• The portable player is obstructed by
certain objects (behind a seat or in the
glove box or console box).
• The portable player touches or is cov-
ered with metal materials.
●Leave the Bluetooth® portable player in
a place where the condition of
Bluetooth® connection is good.
-Portable player information is registered
when the portable player is connected
to the Bluetooth® audio system. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle,
remove the Bluetooth® audio informa-
tion from the system. (See “DELETING
A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 179.)
-FCC ID : HYQDNNS059
Type : DNNS059
IC : 1551A-DNNS059 Canada 310
-This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
●FCC WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
●CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with
at least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
●Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
245
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Canada
-The portable player will be automatically
connected under the following conditions:
• The “POWER” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or ON mode.
• When “Bluetooth* Power” is switched
from off to on.
• When the portable player is discon-
nected for some reason.
● NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions; (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif
doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage est susceptible de
compromettre le fonctionnement du
dispositif.
●This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 20
cm and more between the radiator and
person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands,wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie Canada pour un
environnement non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux
directives d’exposition aux fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est utilisé, il est toutefois souhaitable de
laisser au moins 20 cm entre l’antenne
et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
CAUTION
●Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Co-implantation: cet émetteur ne doit
pas être co-implanté ou actionné en
même temps qu’aucune autre antenne
ou émetteur.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it
is necessary to register a portable
player with the system. Once the porta-
ble player has been registered, it is
possible to listen to the music.
Once the portable player has been reg-
istered, it is possible to listen to music
through the navigation system. (See
“REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DE-
VICE” on page 178.)
INFORMATION
●For operating the portable player, see
the instruction manual that comes with
it.
WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
ON
246
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Connect”.
2Touch the desired portable player.
3When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed. It is now pos-
sible to use the portable player.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
-If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected
on purpose, such as it was turned off, this
does not happen. Reconnect the portable
player manually.
WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
OFF
Manually connect the portable player
in accordance with the following proce-
dure.
INFORMATION
●Touching “Connect Portable Player”
on the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects
a Bluetooth® audio player. (See page
183.)
●When none of the selectable portable
players have been registered, a screen
confirming registration is displayed.
Registration method is the same as
phone registration. (See page 137.)
●When the currently connected portable
player is selected, a screen confirming
the selected player’s disconnection is
displayed. (See page 184.)
●If connection fails once, a changing con-
nection method confirmation screen is
displayed. If connection fails 2 or more
times, a message will be displayed.
When this message is displayed, try
again.
RECONNECTING THE
PORTABLE PLAYER
If the portable player is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode, the system automatically
reconnects the portable player.
247
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1If a Bluetooth® audio player has al-
ready been connected, touch the “BT
Audio” tab to display the screen.
Pressing the “MEDIA” button repeat-
edly can also select the tab.
: Touch to start playing the music.
: Touch to pause the music.
-To start playing the music again, touch
.
-Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, the music may
start playing when touching while it is
paused. Conversely, the music may pause
when touching while it is playing.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
, : Touch to skip to the next or previ-
ous album.
■ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN
1Touch the album name screen button
to display the following playlist screen.
2Touch the desired screen button.
-If the folder name screen button is
touched, the track list screen is displayed.
3Touch the desired track name screen
button.
PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYING AND PAUSING
Bluetooth® AUDIO
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM
248
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track/folder groups. If either of these
screen buttons is touched when the top/
bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track/folder list. To
select the desired track/folder, press the
knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the song.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
INFORMATION
●Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain func-
tions may not be available.
●Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.
249
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
■ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1Touch the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.
2Touch the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
, : Touch to move the list up or down
by 5 track groups. If either of these screen
buttons is touched when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “” or
“” button of “SEEK/TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list. To select
the desired track, press the knob.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for
the screen. Touch to scroll to the end of
the name. Touch to move to the begin-
ning of the name.
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
INFORMATION
●Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain func-
tions may not be available.
250
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-
ING
1Press and hold the “” or “” button
of “SEEK/TRACK” to fast forward or
rewind the track.
-When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
■REPEATING A TRACK
1Touch “RPT” while the track is play-
ing.
-Each time “RPT” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Track Repeat Album Repeat Off
-“RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automati-
cally play it again. To cancel this function,
touch “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat
mode turns off.
■REPEATING AN ALBUM
1Touch “RPT” repeatedly until
“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.
-When the album is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the album and play it again. To cancel this
function, touch “RPT” again.
■PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
ALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” while the track is play-
ing.
-Each time “RAND” is touched, the mode
changes as follows:
• Album Random All Track Random
Off
-Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
album currently being listened to. To can-
cel this function, touch “RAND” repeat-
edly until the random mode turns off.
REPEATING
The track or album currently being lis-
tened to can be repeated.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
251
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALL THE
ALBUMS IN RANDOM ORDER
1Touch “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
-Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the
screen, the system selects a track
randomly from all of the existing albums
on the Bluetooth® device. To cancel this
function, touch “RAND” again.
●Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain func-
tions may not be available.
252
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES)
Volume control switch
-Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
The volume continues to increase while
the switch is being pressed.
-Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-
ume. The volume continues to decrease
while the switch is being pressed.
“MODE” switch
-Press the “MODE” switch to select an
audio mode. Each press changes the
mode sequentially if the desired mode is
ready to use.
-To turn the audio/video system on, press
the “MODE” switch.
-Press and hold the “MODE” switch to
mute/unmute or pause/resume the current
operation.
“ ” switch
Radio
To select a preset station/channel:
Quickly press and release the “” or “”
switch. Repeat this to select the next pre-
set station/channel.
To seek a station/channel: Press and
hold the “” or “” switch until a beep is
heard. Repeat this to find the next station/
channel. If either switch is pressed during
seek mode, seeking will be canceled.
-To seek up or down the frequency, press
and hold the switch until a beep is heard.
When you release the switch, the radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station/
channel. Repeat to find the next station/
channel.
DVD player
-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or
down to a different track, file or chapter in
either direction.
To select a desired track, file or chapter:
Quickly press and release the “” or “”
switch until the desired track, file or chap-
ter to play is selected. To return to the be-
ginning of the current track, file or chapter,
press the “” switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder: Press and
hold the “” or “” switch until a beep is
heard to change to the next or the previous
folder. Repeat it until the desired folder is
selected.
Some parts of the audio/video system
can be adjusted using the switches on
the steering wheel.
No. Switch
Volume control switch
“MODE” switch
“” switch
253
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Bluetooth® audio player
-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or
down to a different track or album in either
direction.
To select a desired track: Quickly press
and release the “” or “” switch until the
desired track is selected. To return to the
beginning of the current track, press the
“” switch once quickly.
To select a desired album: Press and
hold the “” or “” switch until a beep is
heard to change to the next or the previous
album. Repeat it until the desired album is
selected.
USB memory/iPod
-Use the “” or “” switch to skip up or
down to a different file or track in either
direction.
To select a desired file or track: Press
the “” or “” switch until the desired file
or track is selected. To return to the begin-
ning of the current file or track, press the
“” switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder or album
(USB memory only): Press and hold the
“” or “” switch until a beep is heard to
change to the next or the previous folder or
album. Repeat it until the desired folder or
album is selected.
254
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may no-
tice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-
ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the ve-
hicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
NOTICE
●To ensure correct audio/video system
operations:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio/video system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
• The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio/video
system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result
of conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and ter-
rain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can inter-
fere with AM signals. And of course, ra-
dio signals have a limited range. The
farther the vehicle is from a station, the
weaker its signal will be. In addition, re-
ception conditions change constantly
as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception prob-
lems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.
FM
255
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can interfere
with those received directly from the radio
station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected sig-
nal and a signal received directly from a ra-
dio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
cast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
-Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
-Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
-“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
-Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note
that the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
-iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
AM
XM
iPod
256
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-
es can be used with this system.
Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
•iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
•iPhone
Depending on differences between mod-
els or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
-USB memory that can be used for MP3
and WMA playback:
• USB communication formats: USB 2.0
HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT 16/32
• Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
-This DVD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
-Extremely high temperatures can keep the
DVD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
-Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the DVD player skip.
-If moisture gets into the DVD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
COMPATIBLE MODELS
USB MEMORY
CARING FOR YOUR DVD
PLAYER AND DISC
CAUTION
●DVD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation
exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.
257
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be play-
able on your player:
•SACD
•dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• DVD audio
• Video CD
•DVD+R
•DVD+RW
•DVD-RAM
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
Low quality discs
Labeled discs
DVD PLAYER
Audio CDs
DVD video
discs
258
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge
and do not bend them. Avoid getting fin-
gerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
-Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to
skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
-Remove discs from the players when not
in use. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat and direct sun-
light.
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-
free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the cen-
ter to the edge of the disc (not in circles).
Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static device.
-MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-
pression standards.
-The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and
WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-
RW discs.
-The unit can play disc recordings compati-
ble with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and
with the Romeo and Joliet file system.
-When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add
the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or
.wma).
-The MP3/WMA player plays back files
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3
or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-
back errors, use the appropriate file exten-
sions.
-The MP3/WMA player can play only the
first session when using multi-session
compatible CDs.
NOTICE
●Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
●This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
●Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
Correct Wrong
MP3/WMA FILES
259
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible with
the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display
disc title, track title and artist name in
other formats.
-USB memory: MP3 files are compatible
with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver.
2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit
cannot display track title and artist name
in other formats.
-WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
-The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
-MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24
kHz
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1,
48 kHz
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05,
24 kHz
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
-The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-
erally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-
mended.
-MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbps
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320
kbps
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160
kbps
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
*: Variable Bit Rate
-The MP3/WMA player does not play back
MP3/WMA files from discs recorded using
packet write data transfer (UDF format).
Discs should be recorded using “pre-mas-
tering” software rather than packet-write
software.
-M3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
-MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO for-
mats are not compatible with the audio
player.
-The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-
able Bit Rate).
-When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast for-
ward or reverse operations are used.
-It is not possible to check folders that do
not include MP3/WMA files.
-MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels
deep can be played. However, the start of
playback may be delayed when using
discs containing numerous levels of fold-
ers. For this reason, we recommend creat-
ing discs with no more than 2 levels of
folders.
SAMPLING FREQUENCY
PLAYABLE BIT RATES
260
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
-MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play up
to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.
-USB memory: It is possible to play up to
3000 folders, 255 files per folder or 9999
files in the device.
-The order changes depending on the per-
sonal computer and MP3/WMA encoding
software you use.
-CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-
cess that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
-It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-
RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
-It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depend-
ing on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the appropriate
application manufacturers of the applica-
tions.)
-CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera-
tures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
-If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/
WMA player, playback will begin more
slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-
R disc.
-Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.
-This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on-demand to CD-
R, etc., in the same way that data is writ-
ten to floppy or hard discs.
-This is a method of embedding track-
related information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track title, the artist’s name, the album
title, the music genre, the year of produc-
tion, comments and other data. The con-
tents can be freely edited using software
with ID3 tag editing functions. Although
the tags are restricted to a number of
characters, the information can be viewed
when the track is played back.
-WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.mp3
001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
ID3 TAG
WMA TAG
261
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 lev-
els of regulations.
-Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be com-
posed of one-byte capital letters and num-
bers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
-Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
-Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-
ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
-MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organiza-
tion). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
-WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-
ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.
ISO 9660 FORMAT
m3u
MP3
WMA
-Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For
more information visit
www.gracenote.com.
-CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
present Gracenote. Gracenote Soft-
ware, copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and
service. See the Gracenote website for
a non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,
MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote
in the United States and/or other coun-
tries.
262
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Gracenote® End User License Agree-
ment
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file
identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist,
track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online serv-
ers or embedded databases (collec-
tively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to
perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own per-
sonal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EX-
PLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive li-
cense to use the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license termi-
nates, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote be-
come liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may en-
force its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow
the Gracenote service to count que-
ries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information,
see the web page for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy for the Gracenote ser-
vice.
263
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed to
you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no rep-
resentations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories
for any cause that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is made that
the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that function-
ing of Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupt-
ed. Gracenote is not obligated to pro-
vide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the fu-
ture and is free to discontinue its ser-
vices at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IM-
PLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-
ITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TI-
TLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WAR-
RANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO
CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIA-
BLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote
264
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. SETUP
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Audio”.
3Touch “HD Radio Settings”.
4Touch “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.
5Touch the item to be set.
6Touch “Save”.
HD Radio™ SYSTEM
SETTINGS
HD Radio™ system can be set using
the procedure outlined below.
Screen button Function
“All”
Touch to receive both an-
alog and digital broad-
casts.
“HD Only” Touch to receive only digi-
tal broadcasts.
“Analog” Touch to receive only ana-
log broadcasts.
265
2. SETUP
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Audio”.
3Touch “iPod Settings”.
4Touch “Display Cover Art”.
5Touch “On” or “Off”.
iPod SETTINGS
iPod can be set using the procedure
outlined below.
COVER ART DISPLAY
SETTINGS
When the track currently being played
has cover art data, it can be displayed.
266
2. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6
267
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...... 268
STEERING SWITCHES FOR
THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM............................................ 268
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 268
2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION
(ENGLISH ONLY) ..................... 274
3. EXPANDED VOICE
COMMANDS ............................. 276
4. COMMAND LIST ......................... 277
1VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
268
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Talk switch
-Press the talk switch to start the voice
command system.
-To cancel voice recognition, press and
hold the talk switch.
1Press the talk switch.
-After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has
been displayed, voice guidance will com-
mence.
2After a beep sounds, say the command
of your choice.
-Voice commands are marked with .
Some commonly used commands are dis-
played on the screen.
-By saying “Next page” or “Previous
page”, or by touching “Next Pg.”/“Prev.
Pg.”, the screen will display the com-
mands displayed on the page in the back-
ground.
-Saying “Main menu” or touching “Main
Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screen
is displayed will display the “Main Menu”
screen.
-Registered POIs, registered names in the
phonebook etc., can be said in the place
of the “<>” next to the commands. (See
page 277.)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John” etc.
The voice command system enables
the navigation, audio/video and hands-
free systems to be operated using
voice commands.
The operating procedures of voice
commands from the “Shortcut Menu”
screen are explained here.
INFORMATION
●Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated
from the “Main Menu” screen.
STEERING SWITCHES FOR
THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
-Voice guidance for the voice command
system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.
269
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Say the command displayed on the
screen.
-If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of
the following to return to the previous
screen:
•Say “Go back”.
• Touch “Go Back”.
-To cancel voice recognition, touch “Can-
cel”, or press and hold the talk switch.
-Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance
to offer examples of commands and
operation methods.
INFORMATION
●If the navigation system does not
respond or the confirmation screen does
not disappear, press the talk switch and
try again.
●If a voice command cannot be recog-
nized within 6 seconds, voice guidance
will say “Pardon?” (“Command not rec-
ognized.” will be displayed on the
screen) and voice command reception
will restart.
●If a voice command cannot be recog-
nized 2 consecutive times, the voice
command guidance system will say
“Paused. To restart voice recognition,
push the talk switch. To cancel voice
recognition, push and hold the talk
switch.” Then voice recognition will be
suspended.
●The voice recognition prompt can be set
to on or off when “Voice Prompts” is
touched. This setting can also be
changed on the “Voice Settings” screen.
(See page 52.)
●When “Voice Prompts” is touched,
voice recognition will be temporarily sus-
pended. Press the talk switch again.
●Voice guidance can be canceled by set-
ting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command
immediately after pressing the talk
switch and hearing a beep.
270
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Type A
Type B
MICROPHONE
It is unnecessary to speak directly into
the microphone when giving a com-
mand.
INFORMATION
●Wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.
●Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice
commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
●In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command prop-
erly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.
271
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the talk switch.
2Say “Go home”.
-A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results.
3Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.
-The system starts searching for a route to
your home.
-When the voice command is recognized,
the map of the area around the home
address will be displayed and route guid-
ance to the home address will begin.
1Press the talk switch.
2Say “Enter an address”.
-If the destination’s state/province has not
been set or is not contained in the voice
command recognition list, the screen to
input a state/province will be displayed.
-Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
3Say “<city name>”.
-Say the desired city name that belongs to
the set state in the place of the “<>”.
-Say “Change State” to change the set
voice recognition state.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCHING FOR A ROUTE TO
YOUR HOME
-If a home address is not registered,
voice guidance will say “Your home is
not set. Please try again after setting a
home location.” and you will be
prompted to enter a home address.
(See page 97.)
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
PERFORMING A DESTINATION
SEARCH BY ADDRESS
(ENGLISH ONLY)
-For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address, see “SELECTING
THE SEARCH AREA” on page 56.
272
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Say “<street name>”.
-Say the desired full street name, or main
body of the street name that belongs to
the set state in the place of the “<>”.
-The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of
the official street name.
For example, if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command
recognition will recognize “Main”.
5Say “<house number>”.
-Say the desired number, cardinal/intercar-
dinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.
For example: Say “West 555”.
-Inputting the house number can be
skipped.
6Say “Start guidance” or “Show
map”. Alternatively, touch “Start
Guidance” or “Show Map”.
-After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.
INFORMATION
●Even if the state set using voice recogni-
tion is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (For more information on the
“Address” screen, see “SELECTING
THE SEARCH AREA” on page 56.)
●The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal
direction or a hyphen and numerals:
A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say
“and”.)
• Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9
digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal/intercardinal direction
and hyphens are only recognized
once.
• The following cardinal/intercardinal
directions can be recognized: North,
East, West, South, North East, North
West, South East and South West.
●When inputting the house number is
skipped and the recognized candidate
list has multiple entries and so forth, the
full street name may need to be recog-
nized. If this occurs, say the full street
name.
For example, say “East Main Street”
and “East Main Street” will be recog-
nized.
273
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the talk switch.
-“Play Artist <name>” and “Play Album
<name>” are displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.
2Say “Play artist <name>” or “Play al-
bum <name>”.
-Say the desired artist name or album
name in the place of the “<>”.
-A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed.
3Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.
-The system starts playing music.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
SEARCH FOR A TRACK USING
ARTIST NAME OR ALBUM
NAME
-When “Play Artist <name>” is used to
play music, the first track is selected
randomly. For operations beyond play-
ing music, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEO
SYSTEM” section of this manual.
-Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For
more information visit
www.gracenote.com.
INFORMATION
●A USB memory or iPod must be con-
nected to enable track searching and
playback. (See “USB MEMORY OPER-
ATION” on page 233 and “iPod OPERA-
TION” on page 238.)
●When a USB memory or iPod is con-
nected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice
commands.
●Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language
is changed. (See page 46.)
●While the recognition data is being cre-
ated or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice com-
mand.
●While “Play Music” is displayed in the
“Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play
music” to display the music screen from
which searching for a track using a voice
command can be performed.
●When “Play Music” is dimmed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possi-
ble to search for a track using a voice
command. In this situation, reduce the
amount of music data in the USB mem-
ory or iPod and update the recognition
data to enable searching by voice com-
mand.
274
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)
*: Say the desired artist name or album
name in the place of the “<>”.
Due to natural language speech recog-
nition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spo-
ken naturally. However, the system
cannot recognize every variation of
each command. In some situations, it
is possible to omit the command for the
procedure and directly state the de-
sired operation. Not all voice com-
mands are displayed in the short cut
menu.
INFORMATION
●The “Set a Destination”, “Use the
Phone”, “Play Music” and “Get Informa-
tion” commands displayed on the “Short-
cut Menu” screen can be operated using
natural language speech recognition
technology.
●If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the com-
mand that was recognized.)
EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION
Command Expression examples
“Go Home” Let’s go home.
Take me home.
“Enter an Ad-
dress”
I wanna enter an ad-
dress, please.
Put in an address.
“Find Nearby
<POI category>”
Find nearby <Restau-
rants> for me.
I need to see the near-
by <Restaurants>.
“Call <name>
<type>”
Get me <Robert
Brown>.
I need to call <Robert
Brown> at <Work>
right away.
“Dial <number>”
Please dial the number
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.
“Play Artist
<name>”
Play the artist
<XXXXX>.
I’d like to hear the band
<XXXXX>.*
“Play Album
<name>”
Play album <XXXXX>.
Music from album
<XXXXX>.*
275
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Command Expression examples
“Traffic” How’s the traffic?
Check the traffic.
“Weather”
What’s the weather
like?
Let’s get a forecast.
“Sports Scores”
Team scores.
How are my favorite
teams doing?
“Stock Quotes”
Stock quotes.
How are my stocks do-
ing?
“Fuel Prices”
Let’s check fuel prices.
Find the cheapest gas
prices.
●Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be
accessed from the main menu.
●For example, to make an “International
Call”, say “Main menu” while the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is being dis-
played. Then say “Use the phone” fol-
lowed by saying the desired number,
e.g. “123456789”.
276
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS
1Press the talk switch.
2Say “Audio on”.
Touching “On” next to “Expanded
Voice Commands” on the “Voice Set-
tings” screen enables voice command
operation of the audio/video system.
(See page 52.) For more information
on operations that can be controlled
using expanded voice commands, re-
fer to “COMMAND LIST”. (See page
277.)
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE:
TURN THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON
INFORMATION
●Commands relating to operation of the
audio/video system can only be per-
formed when the audio system is turned
on.
●Expanded voice commands can be rec-
ognized when the “Shortcut Menu”
screen is displayed.
277
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. COMMAND LIST
-All commands are listed in the table.
-For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-
played in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands
may not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
-The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.
“Set a Destination”
*1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the
“Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed.
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
-Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46.)
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Find Nearby <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*1> near the
current position. O
“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the ad-
dress. O
“Go Home” Displays the route to home. O
“Destination by Phone Num-
ber”*2Enables setting a destination by saying the
phone number.
278
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 145.)
*1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is being displayed.
“Play Music”
*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut
menu” screen is being displayed.
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Call <name> <type>”
Calls made by saying a name from the phone-
book.
For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call
John Smith, mobile” etc.
O
“Dial <number>”
Calls made by saying the phone number.
For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial
5556667777” etc.
O
“International Call”*1Calls international numbers by saying the
phone number.
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks by the selected artist.
For example: Say “Play artist <XXXXX>”*1O
“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album.
For example: Say “Play album <XXXXX>”*1O
“Play Song <name>”*2Plays the selected track.
For example: Say “Play song Summertime”,
“Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.
“Play Playlist <name>”*2Plays tracks from the selected playlist.
For example: Say “Play playlist My Favorite
Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc.
279
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“Get Information”
Select audio mode
When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 276.)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Traffic” Displays the traffic incident list. O
“Weather” Displays weather information. O
“Sports Scores” Displays the sports list. O
“Stock Quotes” Displays the stocks list. O
“Fuel Prices” Displays the fuel prices list. O
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Radio” Sets the audio mode to radio. O
“AM” Selects the AM band. O
“FM” Selects the FM band. O
“Satellite radio” Selects the satellite radio mode. O
“Disc” Selects the disc audio mode. O
“Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode. O
“Bluetooth* audio” Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode. O
“iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode. O
“USB audio” Selects the USB audio mode. O
“Audio on” Turns the audio system on. O
“Audio off” Turns the audio system off. O
INFORMATION
●Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
●Commands that have a “” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from
the screen that they are displayed in.
280
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7
281
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. FUEL CONSUMPTION ................ 282
FUEL CONSUMPTION ....................... 282
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION
AND COVERAGE AREA........... 283
MAP INFORMATION........................... 283
CERTIFICATION ................................. 284
1. XM SERVICES ............................. 285
1. XM Sports ................................... 286
RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION ... 286
XM Sports SETTINGS —
ADD OR DELETE TEAMS ................ 287
2. XM Stocks................................... 289
RECEIVE STOCK DATA ..................... 289
XM Stocks SETTINGS —
ADD OR DELETE STOCKS.............. 290
3. XM Fuel Prices ........................... 292
SHOW XM Fuel Prices
INFORMATION ................................. 292
VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE
INFORMATION ................................. 292
XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS.................. 293
4. XM NavWeather™ ...................... 295
SHOW XM NavWeather™
INFORMATION ................................. 295
WEATHER INFORMATION................. 296
WEATHER WARNINGS ...................... 297
XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR .......... 297
5. XM NavTraffic®........................... 298
SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT..................... 298
SHOW XM NavTraffic®
INFORMATION ................................. 299
1. XM SETTINGS............................. 301
1INFORMATION DISPLAY
2XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW
3XM FUNCTION OPERATION
4SETUP
INFORMATION
282
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY
1. FUEL CONSUMPTION
- Energy monitor
- Trip information
- Past record
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Fuel consumption information, such as
that shown below, can be displayed on
the screen. For details see Section 1-1
of “Owner’s Manual”.
283
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2.
MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Map Data”.
-The “Map Information” screen will be dis-
played.
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Map Data” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch “Legal Info.”.
-The “Legal Information” screen will be dis-
played.
MAP INFORMATION
Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.
INFORMATION
●Map data updates are available for a
fee. Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther information.
●The “Map Information” screen displays
“Map Version” and “Map Update
ID”. This data is needed to perform a
map data update.
LEGAL INFORMATION
Legal information related to the map
data can be displayed.
284
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Map Data” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch “Map Coverage”.
-The “Map Data Coverage” screen will be
displayed.
For vehicles sold in Canada
MAP COVERAGE
Map data coverage areas can be dis-
played.
CERTIFICATION
-Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. This Category II
radiocommunication device complies
with Industry Canada Standard RSS-
310.
-L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suiva-
ntes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit
être prêt à accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouil-
lage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif. Ce dis-
positif de radiocommunication de
catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310
d’Industrie Canada.
285
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW
1. XM SERVICES
-With an active XM subscription, the follow-
ing features are available:
•XM Sports
*1 (See page 286.)
• XM Stocks*1 (See page 289.)
• XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 292.)
• XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 295.)
•XM NavTraffic
®*2 (See page 298.)
*1: Available at no extra charge with an ac-
tive XM Satellite Radio subscription.
*2: Available via separate XM subscrip-
tion(s).
-XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ and
XM TravelLink require separate XM sub-
scription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* and
XM Fuel Prices are available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. After a 90-day
trial, you must contact XM and set up the
appropriate XM subscription(s) to continue
receiving these services.
*: XM Sports and XM Stocks are included
with an XM Satellite Radio subscription.
-The XM NavTraffic® service is available in
the contiguous 48 U.S. states and
Canada.
-The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM
Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services are
available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states.
-To receive XM NavTraffic®, XM
NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks
and XM Fuel Prices services, the XM
service must be activated. To activate the
service, call the XM Listener Care Center
at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-
0079 (Canada).
-Customers should have their radio ID
ready. The radio ID can be found by
selecting “CH 000” on the radio. For
details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO
ID” on page 207.
XM services are subscription-based
XM Satellite Radio services to provide
convenient features to subscribers.
SUBSCRIPTION(S)
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)
ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)
INFORMATION
●For details about the XM service cover-
age areas, refer to www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada),
or call XM Listener Care Center at 1-
800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-
0079 (Canada).
●For further details about the service,
contact your Toyota dealer.
●XM Satellite Radio is responsible for all
fees and services, which are subject to
change.
286
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
1. XM Sports
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Sports”.
-The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.
-The following operations can be per-
formed:
• Sports information can be received. (See
page 286.)
• XM Sports settings can be set. (See
page 287.)
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Sports” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch the desired team to receive in-
formation.
-Teams for which there is no current data
available will be dimmed and you will not
be able to select them.
4Touch the individual information item
to hear it, or touch “Read All” to hear
all available information for that team.
-The selected information will be read out
in its entirety.
XM Sports is a service included with an
XM Satellite Radio subscription. This
service is also available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. With this ser-
vice, you can receive updates via the
navigation system on your personally
selected sports teams.
RECEIVE SPORTS
INFORMATION
The desired teams must be added in
order to receive information. (See
page 287.)
287
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Sports” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch “Options”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1Touch “Add Sports Team”.
-Up to 5 teams can be added and saved in
the system for which information will be
received. The desired teams can be
changed at any time. Teams must be
added one at a time.
2Touch the desired sporting league of
the team.
3Touch the name of the desired team to
be added from the list that appears.
4Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.
XM Sports SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE TEAMS
To input your personalized XM Sports
team.
-Personalized XM Sports teams can also
be input from the “Setup” screen. (See
“XM SETTINGS” on page 301.)
ADD SPORTS TEAM
288
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Delete Sports Teams”.
2Touch the individual sports team to be
deleted or touch “Select All” to delete
all the teams, and touch “Delete”.
3Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.
DELETE SPORTS TEAMS
289
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. XM Stocks
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Stocks”.
-The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.
-The following operations can be per-
formed:
• Stock data can be received. (See page
289.)
• XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page
290.)
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch an individual stock to hear its re-
lated data, or touch “Read All” to hear
the data for all the stocks saved in the
system.
-The selected data will be read out in its
entirety.
-Stock data may be delayed by approxi-
mately 20 minutes.
XM Stocks is a service included with
an XM Satellite Radio subscription.
This service is also available with an
XM TravelLink subscription. With this
service, you can receive updates via
the navigation system on your person-
ally selected stocks.
RECEIVE STOCK DATA
You must first add your desired stocks
prior to receiving data. (See page 290.)
290
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-
tion” screen.
3Touch “Options”.
4Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1Touch “Add Stock”.
2Input the desired stock symbol.
3When finished, touch “OK”.
-Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be
added and saved in the system for which
information will be received. Stocks must
be input one at a time. To enter a stock,
the symbol of the desired stock must be
known.
XM Stocks SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE STOCKS
To input your personalized XM Stocks
settings.
-Personalized XM Stocks settings can
also be input from the “Setup” screen.
(See “XM SETTINGS” on page 301.)
ADD STOCK
291
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Delete Stocks”.
2Touch the individual stock to be delet-
ed or touch “Select All” to delete all
the stocks, and touch “Delete”.
3Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to
cancel.
DELETE STOCKS
292
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. XM Fuel Prices
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.
-The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed.
Gas station name
Sort
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Infor-
mation” screen.
3Touch the desired gas station from the
list.
-The location of the selected gas station
will be displayed on the map screen.
XM Fuel Prices is a service included
with an XM TravelLink subscription. It
enables the navigation system to dis-
play current fuel prices and gas station
locations, which can be set as a desti-
nation if desired.
SHOW XM Fuel Prices
INFORMATION
XM Fuel Prices SCREEN
VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE
INFORMATION
293
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Touch “Info”.
-When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 0.5 miles (800 m), is not
shown. When the map scale is at the mini-
mum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is not
shown.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Other”.
3Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.
“Mark”: Touch to mark the selected gas
station on the map screen.
“Go to ”: Touch to set the selected
gas station as a destination with route di-
rections.
“Add to Route”: Touch to add the se-
lected gas station as a destination.
“Detail”: Touch to read the selected gas
station’s information.
-If is touched, the registered
phone number can be called.
●The information displayed is received
via satellite radio. Depending on the
time the information is received, the dis-
played information may not be up to
date.
XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS
The desired fuel type, preferred brand,
and show prices reported can be regis-
tered.
REGISTER FUEL TYPE
294
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4Touch “Fuel Type”.
5Touch the desired fuel type.
-“Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or
“Diesel” can be selected.
6Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Other” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Preferred Brand”.
5Touch the preferred brand.
6Touch “Save”.
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Other” on the “Setup” screen.
3Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.
4Touch “Show Prices Reported”.
5Touch the desired period.
-“Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or
“Show All” can be selected.
-If “Show All” is selected, information
about gas stations which fuel prices are
not provided is also displayed on the
list.
6Touch “Save”.
REGISTER PREFERRED
BRAND
REGISTER SHOW PRICES
REPORTED
295
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. XM NavWeather™
-The following operations can be per-
formed:
• Show XM NavWeather™ information:
Weather forecast information is dis-
played on the map screen. (See page
295.)
• Weather information: Weather informa-
tion for the selected city is displayed.
(See page 296.)
• Weather warnings: Weather warnings
issued within a radius of approximately
15 miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km)
around the vehicle are displayed on the
warning screen. (See page 297.)
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “XM NavWeather”.
-The XM NavWeather screen is displayed.
“Info”
-When the city icon is touched, “Info” is
displayed on the map screen. Touching
this screen button displays the “Forecast”
screen. (See page 296.)
City icon
-When this screen button is touched, city
names and “Info” are displayed on the
upper part of the screen.
“Forecast”
-When this screen button is touched, the
city selection screen is displayed.
• Touch a city to display weather informa-
tion. Weather information of the selected
city will be displayed. (See page 296.)
“Current Location”
-When “Current Location” is touched, the
current position is displayed.
Zoom in/out screen button
-The scale of the map can be changed.
Three zoom levels can be selected; 16
miles (26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60
miles (97 km).
The subscription-based XM
NavWeather™ service allows the nav-
igation system to display weather infor-
mation on the map screen.
SHOW XM NavWeather™
INFORMATION
XM NavWeather™ SCREEN
296
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Weather icons and grids
-Inclement weather information is dis-
played on the map using weather icons
and grids. Touching an icon shows the
related information at the top of the
screen.
Icon Weather
Tornado
Hurricane
Storm
Flood
Winter
Wind
Extremes
Other
Hail storm
Severe thunderstorm
Heavy fog
Heavy freezing rain/ice
Heavy snow
Heavy rain
WEATHER INFORMATION
No. Function
Received time
City name
Today’s date
Current weather
Current temperature
Today’s weather
Tomorrow’s weather
Day after tomorrow’s weather
Observed time (Time elapsed since
last update)
Specified day’s weather
297
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When the specified day’s weather screen
button is touched, weather information for
a specified day is displayed.
“Weather Map”: When this screen button
is touched, the “XM NavWeather” screen
is displayed.
“OK”: When this screen button is touched,
the screen returns to the map of the cur-
rent position.
-When an XM NavWeather™ warning is
issued within the vicinity, the XM
NavWeather™ indicator will appear on the
map screen.
No. Function
Daytime weather
Nighttime weather
Maximum temperature
Minimum temperature
Precipitation probability
WEATHER WARNINGS
Weather warnings issued within a radi-
us of approximately 15 miles (25 km)
or 7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehi-
cle are displayed on the warning
screen.
XM NavWeather™
INDICATOR
298
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5. XM NavTraffic®
The following operations can be per-
formed:
-Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Traffic
information is displayed on the map
screen. (See page 299.)
-Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy conges-
tion or moderate traffic has been detected
on the guidance route, it may be possible
for you to select another route offered by
the system. (See page 114.)
-Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic conges-
tion information is provided using voice
guidance. (See page 53.)
-Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing
traffic is shown by the arrow on the map.
(See page 115.)
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Traffic Incidents”.
-A list of current traffic incidents is dis-
played along with information on the inci-
dent’s distance and position relative to the
vehicle.
3Touch the desired traffic event.
“On Current Route”: Touch to display the
traffic congestion information for the se-
lected route, or the road which the current
vehicle is on. If a route has not been set,
“On Current Road” will be displayed.
The subscription-based XM NavTraffic®
service allows the navigation system to
display traffic information on the map
screen.
INFORMATION
●When the “Traffic Information” indica-
tor is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic
Incident Warning” and “Show Free Flow-
ing Traffic” will not operate. (See page
299.)
SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT
299
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4This screen is displayed.
-Guidance route traffic information is dis-
played on the screen. Touch “Detail” to
display detailed traffic event information.
1Touch “Show on Map”.
2Touch “Traffic Information”.
-The “Traffic Information” indicator is
highlighted.
3XM NavTraffic® information is dis-
played on the map screen.
On the map screen
On the freeway information screen
SHOW XM NavTraffic®
INFORMATION
300
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
XM NavTraffic® icon
-When any traffic information is received,
the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear on the
map screen. Touching the XM NavTraffic®
icon on the screen will start voice guid-
ance for the traffic information. (See page
37.)
-When the XM NavTraffic® icon is selected,
voice guidance for the traffic information
will start even if “Off” for “Traffic Incident
Warning” is selected.
XM NavTraffic®information arrow
-When any XM NavTraffic® information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® information
arrow will appear on the map screen. The
color of the arrow changes depending on
the traffic information received.
XM NavTraffic® indicator
-When any XM NavTraffic® information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® indicator will
appear on the screen. The color of the
indicator changes depending on the traffic
information received.
*: Touching the XM NavTraffic® indicator
will start voice guidance.
Color Function
Red Heavy congestion
Yell ow Moderate traffic
Green Freely flowing traffic
Color Function
White Traffic information has been
received.
Yel low
Traffic restriction informa-
tion on the guidance route
has been received (screen
button*).
Red
Congestion information on
the guidance route has
been received (screen but-
ton*).
301
7
INFORMATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. SETUP
1. XM SETTINGS
1Press the “SETUP” button.
2Touch “Other”.
3Touch the item to be set.
-On this screen, the following functions
can be performed:
Used for changing settings for XM
Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Pric-
es.
No. Function Page
Touch to set XM Sports. 286
Touch to set XM Stocks. 289
Touch to set XM Fuel Pric-
es. 292
302
4. SETUP
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
8
303
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. ENTUNE SERVICE ..................... 304
SUBSCRIPTION .................................. 305
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE............... 305
INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA ........ 305
2. BEFORE USING ENTUNE.......... 306
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE
ENTUNE............................................ 306
USER REGISTRATION ....................... 306
REGISTERING THE ENTUNE
APPLICATION................................... 307
1. ACTIVATING “APPS”................. 308
ACTIVATING “APPS” .......................... 308
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS
ON THE SCREEN............................. 310
2. LINKING “APPS” AND
NAVIGATION LOCAL
FUNCTION ................................ 311
SETTING A DESTINATION USING
“APPS” .............................................. 312
MAKING A PHONE CALL USING
“APPS” .............................................. 312
3. INPUTTING KEYWORD
OPERATION ............................. 313
INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING
THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD......... 313
INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING
THE VOICE RECOGNITION
FUNCTION........................................ 313
1ENTUNE-OVERVIEW
2ENTUNE OPERATION
APPS
304
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW
1. ENTUNE SERVICE*1
Entune is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be
displayed on and operated from the navigation screen. Before Entune can be used,
a few settings need to be performed. (See page 306.)
No. Name Function
Contents provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.
Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular
phone.
Cellular phone*2
Using the Entune application, communication is relayed be-
tween the navigation system, the application server and the
contents provider.
A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.
Application player Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation
system is equipped with an application player.
Applications
(“Apps”)
Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents
providers via a cellular phone on the application player.
Navigation system Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents pro-
vider servers are displayed on the navigation screen.
*1: Entune is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.
*2: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.Toyota.com/entune/.
8
APPS
305
1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-Entune will be available on a 3 year trial
period included upon purchase of a new
vehicle. User registration is required to
start using the service. (See page 307.)
-When 3 years have elapsed after purchas-
ing a new vehicle, a fee will be charged to
renew the contract.*
-Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*
*: For details, refer to http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/ or call 1-800-
331-4331.
-Entune is available in the 48 states, D.C.
and Alaska.
-The following personal data can be
deleted and returned to their default set-
tings:
• Downloaded contents
• Radio stations that were listened to
• Input history
SUBSCRIPTION
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE
●When using Entune, depending on the
details of your cellular phone contract,
data usage fees may apply. Confirm
data usage fees before using this ser-
vice.
●In this section, the required operations
to activate “Apps”, connect a cellular
phone to the navigation system and reg-
istration steps for Entune are explained.
For details regarding Entune operations
and each of the “Apps”, refer to http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/.
INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
The personal data used in “Apps” can
be reset. (See “DELETING PERSON-
AL DATA” on page 51.)
INFORMATION
●Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay
close attention when initializing the data.
306
1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. BEFORE USING ENTUNE
Perform the settings in the following order.
In order to use Entune, the following set-
tings must first be performed:
-User registration with the service contract
(See page 306.)
-Download the Entune application onto
your cellular phone, and login to the appli-
cation. (See page 307.)
-Register the cellular phone that the
Entune application was downloaded to
with the navigation system. (See page
307.)
-Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (For detailed informa-
tion about registration and settings, see
“Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 177.)
1Perform user registration from the des-
ignated web address.
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO
USE ENTUNE
1User registration
2Download the Entune application to
your cellular phone.
3Register the cellular phone with the
navigation system.
USER REGISTRATION
When purchasing the vehicle, an email
address is registered at your Toyota
dealer. If your email address was not
registered at your Toyota dealer, your
email address can be registered at the
Entune website. A user registration
guidance email containing a web ad-
dress will be sent.
8
APPS
307
1. ENTUNE-OVERVIEW
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Download the Entune application using
your cellular phone.
2Run the Entune application on your
cellular phone.
3Enter a user name and password into
the Entune application. Login to the ap-
plication.
REGISTERING THE ENTUNE
APPLICATION
●“Apps” can only be used when the
Entune application has been down-
loaded to your cellular phone and the
application is running.
●If your email address was not registered
at your Toyota dealer when the vehicle
was purchased, an email address can
be registered at http://www.Toyota.com/
entune/.
●Entune operational procedures can also
be confirmed by visiting http://
www.Toyota.com/entune/.
●In order to use “Apps”, it is necessary to
run the Entune application, enter your
user name and password and display
the main menu on the cellular phone.
●An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Entune
by connecting via USB. The system
uses the connection method that was
used last. Therefore, if connected via
USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is
necessary to reconnect the iPhone via
Bluetooth®.
308
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
1. ACTIVATING “APPS”
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Apps”.
3A screen indicating that updates are
being checked for will be displayed.
4Touch “Update”.
-To cancel updating, touch “Cancel”.
-After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
-The “Information” screen will also be dis-
played if updating fails.
5A screen indicating that an update is in
progress will be displayed.
-To stop updating, touch “Cancel”.
-After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
-The “Information” screen will also be dis-
played if updating fails.
6Touch “OK”.
Each time “Apps” is activated, the sys-
tem checks for updates. When there
are no updates available, the main
menu screen will be displayed right af-
ter a screen indicating that updates are
being checked for has been displayed.
ACTIVATING “APPS”
8
APPS
309
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7When updating is complete, the main
menu screen will be displayed.
-The screen shown above is only an exam-
ple. The actual screen may be different.
-For details about the function and service
of each application displayed in the main
menu, refer to http://www.Toyota.com/
entune/.
310
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on
the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested
corrective action.
Message Display conditions Corrective action
“This feature is unavailable
during an emergency call.”
Safety Connect is being im-
plemented.
After Safety Connect is fin-
ished, perform the operation
again.
“This feature is unavailable
while transferring contacts.”
Contacts are being trans-
ferred manually from the
phonebook.
When the transfer of contacts
is complete, perform the op-
eration.
“There is a problem with the
Bluetooth* connection.
For troubleshooting
assistance, please visit
Toyota.com or call 1-800-
331-4331.”
The cellular phone cannot be
connected.
Refer to http://www.Toyota.
com/entune/ to confirm if the
phone is compatible or not.
“This feature is unavailable
during a handsfree call.”
A hands-free call is in
progress.
After the hands-free call is fin-
ished, perform the operation.
“To use the services, an ac-
tive application needs to be
running on your phone. For
more information, please visit
Toyota.com.”
The Entune application can-
not be connected to SSP.
Refer to http://www.Toyota.
com/entune/ to confirm if the
phone is SSP compatible or
not, and then activate the
Entune application.
“Communication error.
Please try again.”
Communication was discon-
nected.
After a few moments, retry
the operation.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
311
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
8
APPS
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION
1Press the “INFO/APPS” button.
2Touch “Apps”.
3A screen indicating that updates are
being checked for will be displayed.
4When updating is complete, the main
menu screen will be displayed.
-The screen shown above is only an exam-
ple. The actual screen may be different.
-For details about the function and service
of each application displayed in the main
menu, refer to http://www.Toyota.com/
entune/.
The navigation system’s setting a des-
tination and making a hands-free call
can be performed via “Apps” of
Entune.
INFORMATION
●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering
wheel.
312
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Touch “Map”.
2Touch “Go to ”.
3To start guidance, touch “OK”.
1Touch “Call”.
2Touch “Yes”.
-To cancel making a phone call, touch
“Cancel”.
3A screen indicating that a call is in
progress will be displayed.
SETTING A DESTINATION
USING “APPS”
Locations that were searched using
“Apps” can be set as a destination.
-For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button, see “STARTING ROUTE GUID-
ANCE” on page 74.
MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING “APPS”
Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched using “Apps”.
-For phone operation and the function of
each screen button, see “TALK ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE” on page 149.
313
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
8
APPS
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION
1Touch the character input space.
2Touch the screen buttons to input the
desired characters, and then touch
“OK”.
3Input characters will be reflected on the
character input space.
1Touch the microphone screen button.
2When this screen is displayed, say the
desired keyword.
-Completion of saying the keyword will be
detected automatically.
A keyword can be input to “Apps” by
the software keyboard or voice recog-
nition function.
-The keyboard layout can be changed.
(See page 47.)
INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD
-For details on operating the keyboard,
see “INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUM-
BERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION” on
page 28.
INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION FUNCTION
Voice recognition is a function that
uses the center’s database to enable
the use of the voice recognition func-
tion.
314
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Search results will be displayed on the
screen.
-The screen shown above is only an exam-
ple. The actual screen may be different.
8
APPS
315
2. ENTUNE OPERATION
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
316
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ............................. 318
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ........ 320
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA............................ 320
1REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
9
9
317
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. INTRODUCTION .......................... 322
ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE
SYSTEM ........................................... 322
PRE-SUPPORT SWITCH ................... 323
2. MANEUVERING WHEN
PARKING................................... 324
MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING..... 324
3. PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR
PARKING).................................. 330
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 330
PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION ............... 330
EASY SET FUNCTION ....................... 331
OPERATING PROCEDURE ............... 333
TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION........................ 340
4. PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE......................................... 344
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE ............................................... 344
PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION ............... 344
OPERATING PROCEDURE ............... 345
TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION........................ 352
5. WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS
DISPLAYED .............................. 355
WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT
OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ......... 355
WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN
THE ASSIST MODE.......................... 359
6. MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
MODE ........................................ 360
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN PARKING
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING) ........ 360
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARALLEL PARKING ....................... 365
7. USAGE PRECAUTIONS ............. 366
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 366
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 368
THE ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM CAMERA ....... 369
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE DISPLAY AND
THE ACTUAL ROAD......................... 370
WHEN A THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECT IS NEARBY ........................ 372
SENSOR.............................................. 373
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM ............... 375
2ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
318
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
1To display the rear view image on the
screen, shift the shift position to “R”
when the “POWER” switch is in ON
mode and the back door is completely
closed.
The rear view monitor system assists
the driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle while backing
up. The image is displayed in reverse
on the screen. This reversed image is
a similar image to the one on the inside
rear view mirror.
-If you move the shift position out of the
“R”, the screen returns to the previous
screen. Operating another function of
the navigation system will display
another screen.
-The rear view monitor system is a sup-
plement device intended to assist back
up. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visu-
ally.
CAUTION
●Never depend on the rear view monitor
system entirely when backing up.
Always make sure your intended path is
clear.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
●Never back up while looking only at the
screen. The image on the screen is dif-
ferent from actual conditions. Depicted
distances between objects and flat sur-
faces will differ from actual distance. If
you back up while looking only at the
screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person
or an object. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehi-
cle visually and with mirrors before pro-
ceeding.
●Do not use the system when the back
door is not completely closed.
●Use your own eyes to confirm the vehi-
cle’s surroundings, as the displayed
image may become faint or dark, and
moving images will be distorted, or not
entirely visible when the outside temper-
ature is low. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehi-
cle visually and with mirror before pro-
ceeding.
319
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
9
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
●If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-
tion and mounting angle of the camera
may change. Be sure to have the cam-
era’s position and mounting angle
checked at your Toyota dealer.
●As the camera has a water proof con-
struction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect oper-
ation.
●If the temperature changes rapidly, such
as when hot water is poured on the vehi-
cle in cold weather, the system may not
operate normally.
●Do not hit the camera or subject it to
strong impact as this may cause its posi-
tion and mounting angle to change.
●Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If
the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
●Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off
as soon as possible.
●When replacing the tires, please consult
your Toyota dealer. If you replace the
tires, the area displayed on the screen
may change.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply
intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in
the camera malfunctioning.
INFORMATION
●If the camera lens becomes dirty, it can-
not transmit a clear image. If water drop-
lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens,
rinse with water and wipe with a soft
cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash
it with a mild cleanser and rinse.
320
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The image displayed on the screen is
an approximation only.
INFORMATION
●The area detected by the camera is lim-
ited. The camera does not detect
objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper.
●The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
Corners of bumper
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA
The rear view monitor system camera
is located as shown in the illustration.
INFORMATION
●The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual dis-
tance.
●When the camera is used under fluores-
cent lights, sodium lights or mercury
lights etc., the lights and the illuminated
areas may appear to flicker.
●In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the screen,
even when the system is functioning:
• In the dark (for example, at night)
• When the temperature near the lens is
high or low
• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high
(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,
snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-
era
• When the camera has scratches or dirt
on it
• When the sun or the beam of head-
lights is shining directly into the cam-
era lens
321
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
9
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
• If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera, the smear effect*
peculiar to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect
A phenomenon that occurs when a
bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera; when transmitted by
the camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it.
322
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
1. INTRODUCTION
-As the system only assists with parking in
a set target parking position, there are
times when the system will be unable to
render this assistance, depending on fac-
tors such as road surface or vehicle condi-
tion, or the distance to the set target
parking position.
■SELECTING A LANGUAGE
See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 46 for the procedure to select a
language. Once you select a language,
the advanced parking guidance system
will indicate that language until you se-
lect another language.
ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
The advanced parking guidance sys-
tem helps back up parking by combin-
ing and displaying guide lines on a
rear-view image in order to provide a
reference for back up maneuvering, as
well as automatically controlling the
steering wheel when backing into a tar-
get parking position set on the screen.
The system will not automatically back
up or regulate speed.
The advanced parking guidance sys-
tem is not an automatic parking sys-
tem. It is a system to assist back up
parking.
CAUTION
●When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, and then dis-
able the system by touching on the
screen.
●Depending on the characteristics of the
camera lens, the distance to or position
of people or obstacles shown on the
screen may differ slightly from actual
conditions.
323
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
-Pressing the pre-support switch while
“POWER” switch is in ON mode and the
vehicle is travelling below 9 mph (15 km/h)
with the shift position in any position other
than “P” or “R”, will cause the screen to
change in the following order.
-If the pre-support function cannot be used,
two beeps will sound.
PRE-SUPPORT SWITCH
Use this switch to turn on/off the pre-
support function and to switch assist
mode between parallel parking assist
mode and perpendicular parking assist
mode.
Pre-support function OFF
(Navigation screen, etc.)
Parallel parking assist mode
pre-support screen
Perpendicular parking assist
mode pre-support screen
Pre-support function OFF
(Navigation screen, etc.)
324
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. MANEUVERING WHEN PARKING
1To activate the advanced parking guid-
ance system, shift the shift position to
“R” when the “POWER” switch is in ON
mode and the back door is completely
closed.
-If you move the shift position out of “R”,
the screen returns to the previous screen.
Operating another function of the naviga-
tion system will display another screen.
-Even if the shift position is in “R”, if you
press any of the mode buttons around the
display, such as “MAP/VOICE” or “INFO/
APPS”, the screen will switch to that
mode.
MANEUVERING WHEN
PARKING
Instructions given are only examples.
When and how much to turn the steer-
ing wheel will vary according to traffic
conditions, road surface conditions,
vehicle condition, etc. when parking.
It is necessary to be fully aware of this
before using the advanced parking
guidance system.
Also, when parking, be sure to check
that the parking space will accommo-
date your vehicle before maneuvering
into it.
CAUTION
●Depending on the circumstances of the
vehicle (number of passengers, amount
of luggage, etc.), the position of the
guide lines displayed on the screen may
change. Be sure to check visually
behind and all around the vehicle before
proceeding.
TO ACTIVATE THE ADVANCED
PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
325
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
No. Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. The selected
function will remain even after the hy-
brid system turns off and then re-
starts it.
The parking assist function assists
the driver by automatically control-
ling the steering wheel when back-
ing up, in order to park in the target
parking position set on the screen.
The parking guide line display
function assists the driver by dis-
playing an image of the area
behind the vehicle while backing
up.
When the parking assist function is
selected, the select button is high-
lighted.
Camera orientation confirmation
lines
If the edge of the bumper displayed
on the screen does not match the
camera orientation confirmation
lines, the camera may not be aligned
correctly. Have the vehicle checked
by your Toyota dealer.
THE MODES OF THE PARKING
ASSIST FUNCTION
The parking assist function has the
parking assist mode and parallel park-
ing assist mode. Use each mode ac-
cording to need.
The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.
No. Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the park-
ing assist function is selected, the se-
lect button is highlighted.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
vehicle width.
Estimated path guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
path in which the vehicle moves
backward.
The lines move in sync with the
steering wheel.
326
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Distance guide line (yellow)
The line moves, together with the es-
timated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indi-
cates a position on the ground ap-
proximately 3 ft. (1 m) behind the rear
bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.
Distance guide line (red)
The line moves, together with the es-
timated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indi-
cates a position on the ground ap-
proximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind the
rear bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.
Distance guide line (blue)
The line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehi-
cle.
Parallel parking assist mode button
Touch to turn parallel parking assist
mode on.
See “PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE” on page 344 for details.
No. Function
Parking assist mode button
Touch to turn parking assist mode
on.
See “PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING)” on
page 330 for details.
INFORMATION
●The guide lines, buttons and camera ori-
entation confirmation lines will not be
displayed if the back door is open. To
display them, close the back door com-
pletely.
No. Function
327
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
When in the parking assist mode or par-
allel parking assist mode, in the follow-
ing case the voice guidance will say
“The guidance has been canceled.”, a
message will be displayed, and the sys-
tem will be disabled. For displayed mes-
sage, see page 355.
After the following operations
-Moving the steering wheel
-Using the accelerator
-Moving the shift position out of “R”
-Applying the parking brake
-Switching the screen display
In the following situation
-If the vehicle slips forward or stops after
taking your foot off the brake pedal
-If the backing speed is too fast
-If normal assistance cannot be rendered
due to worn tires or low tire inflation pres-
sure
-If the target parking position has not been
confirmed on the target parking position
setting screen before backing up
-Any warnings displayed on the screen are
not acknowledged before backing up
-If there is a system malfunction
-If the system temperature protection func-
tion operates
If the system is disabled while backing
up, grip the steering wheel firmly and de-
press the brake pedal to bring the vehi-
cle to a halt. The system has been
completely disabled, so you may either
start again from the beginning, or if you
wish to finish parking manually, be sure
to operate the steering wheel as you
would normally.
■ESTIMATED PATH GUIDANCE
MODE
DISABLING THE ADVANCED
PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
THE MODES OF THE PARKING
GUIDE LINE DISPLAY
FUNCTION
The parking guide line display function
has the following modes. Use each
mode according to need.
The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.
No. Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the park-
ing assist function is selected, the se-
lect button is highlighted.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
vehicle width.
Estimated path guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
path in which the vehicle moves
backward. The lines move in sync
with the steering wheel.
328
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
■PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DIS-
PLAY MODE
Distance guide line (yellow)
The line moves, together with the es-
timated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indi-
cates a position on the ground ap-
proximately 3 ft. (1 m) behind the rear
bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.
Distance guide line (red)
The line moves, together with the es-
timated path guide lines, in sync with
the steering wheel. This line indi-
cates a position on the ground ap-
proximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind the
rear bumper of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel is turned,
distance errors may occur.
Distance guide line (blue)
The line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehi-
cle.
Parking assist guide line display
mode screen button
Touch to turn parking assist guide
line display mode on.
No. Function
The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.
No. Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the park-
ing assist function is selected, the se-
lect button is highlighted.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated
vehicle width.
Parking assist guide lines
These lines indicate the points at
which you turn the steering wheel.
These lines also indicate a estimated
path for guidance when turning the
smallest degree of the wheel while
backing up.
Distance guide line
This line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehi-
cle.
329
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
■COURSE LINE DELETION MODE
Course line deletion mode screen
button
Touch to turn course line deletion
mode on.
No. Function
The guide lines are displayed on the
screen.
No. Function
Select button
Touch to switch between the parking
assist function and the parking guide
line display function. When the park-
ing assist function is selected, the se-
lect button is highlighted.
Distance guide line
This line indicates a position on the
ground approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
behind the rear bumper of the vehi-
cle.
Estimated path guidance mode
screen button
Touch to turn estimated path guid-
ance mode on.
INFORMATION
●The guide lines and buttons will not dis-
play if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.
330
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. PARKING ASSIST MODE (PERPENDICULAR PARKING)
-Guidance will not be given if the detected
space is narrow.
Parking on the next side of another
parked vehicle
Parking between two parked vehicles
PARKING ASSIST MODE
(PERPENDICULAR PARKING)
Parking assist mode assists the driver
with perpendicular parking by automati-
cally controlling the steering wheel when
backing up, in order to park in the target
position set on the screen.
This mode can be used when the assist
mode is ON.
PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION
The pre-support function can be used
when another vehicle is parked on the
near side of the intended parking space.
This function uses a tone to give parking
guidance.
Press the pre-support switch twice
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to maneuver the
steering wheel
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering
Press the pre-support switch twice
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to maneuver the
steering wheel
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering
331
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
This function has the following features:
1. When the shift position is in “R” and a
white parking space outline has been
detected, the target parking position
can be minutely adjusted.
2. If a white parking space outline has not
been detected under the conditions de-
scribed in 1 above: by turning the steer-
ing wheel toward the desired parking
space, a white parking space outline
can be detected in that direction and
set as the target parking position.
●To allow the pre-support system to acti-
vate accurately, move the vehicle as
slowly as possible (at a speed that will
allow the vehicle to be stopped sud-
denly).
●If only one vehicle is parked, the pre-
support system cannot be used to park
on the right side of the vehicle.
●The function cannot be used if the shift
position is in “P” or “R”, or if the vehicle
speed is faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).
●In order to identify parking spaces and
detect parked vehicles using the sen-
sors on both sides of the front bumper,
guidance cannot be given if a space is
not detected.
●Parking space guidance and searching
continues until the vehicle speed is
faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or until the
function is turned off by pressing the
pre-support switch.
EASY SET FUNCTION
The easy set function can be used if the
pre-support function is not in use.
If the parking space has a white outline,
the easy set function can be used to
commence parking without adjusting the
target parking position.
332
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
INFORMATION
●The easy set function will not operate in
the following cases:
• When the assist mode is OFF
• When the pre-support function is in
use
• When parallel parking
●Under the following circumstances, a
parking space outline may not be
detected on the road and the easy set
function may not operate:
• The parking space does not have a
white outline (roped or blocked parking
spaces etc.)
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
• The road surface is of a light color
which does not contrast well with the
white lines. (yellow lines painted on
concrete road surfaces, etc.)
• The parking space lines are a color
other than white (yellow etc.).
• The area is dark, for example at night
or in a covered parking lot.
• During or after rain, when the road sur-
face is wet and reflects light, or pud-
dles have formed.
• The sun is shining directly on the cam-
era, for example early morning or late
afternoon.
• The parking space is covered with
snow or de-icing agent.
• There are markings or maintenance
marks on the road surface.
• The color or brightness of the road sur-
face is not uniform.
• Hot or cold water has splashed on the
camera, and the lens is fogged.
• There are dirt or water droplets on the
lens.
INFORMATION
●Under the following circumstances, the
target parking space may be mis recog-
nized:
• There are obstructions such as mainte-
nance damage, road markings, poles
etc.
• During or after rain, when the road sur-
face is wet and reflects light, or pud-
dles have formed.
• The color or brightness of the road sur-
face is not uniform.
• The parking space is on a slope
• An effect is being caused by parked
vehicle (the shadow, grill, sidestep etc.
of a parked vehicle)
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
●Even in situations where the easy set
function cannot be used (for example,
when the parking space outline is miss-
ing or difficult to detect), the target park-
ing position can still be set by touching
the Parking assist mode button.
333
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
As the system only assists with parking
in a set target parking position, there are
times when the system will be unable to
render this assistance, depending on
factors such as road surface or vehicle
condition, or the distance to the set tar-
get parking position.
Use the system with full understanding
of the fact.
If a message is displayed while maneu-
vering, follow the procedures outlined in
“WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED” on page
355.
The illustrations here describe the pro-
cedure for pulling into a parking space
on the right. For pulling into a parking
space on the left, substitute left for right
and vice versa in all steps.
The operating method differs depending
on whether or not the pre-support func-
tion is in use.
1Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.
2With the vehicle speed at less than 9
mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle on the
near side of the parking space, press
the pre-support switch twice. Confirm
that the display has switched to the
“Back-In Mode” screen.
-The mode will switch with each press of
the pre-support switch.
-If the shift position is in “P” or if the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or above, two
beeps will sound when the pre-support
switch is pressed, and the display will not
change. (If the shift position is in “R”, the
display will not change.)
OPERATING PROCEDURE
●When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, then disable
the system by touching on the
screen.
WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS IN USE
Press the pre-support switch twice
Sensor detection range
334
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3Move the vehicle to a position perpen-
dicular to the parking space, and as
close as possible to the parked vehicle.
-Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible so that the steering wheel can be
turned as soon as the chime sounds.
-To cancel the guidance function, turn off
the pre-support function by pressing the
pre-support switch once.
4As soon as the chime sounds, rotate
the wheel halfway or more and pro-
ceed forwards.
-The chime sounds when the center of the
parking space can be seen directly beside
the vehicle.
5When two chimes sound, stop the ve-
hicle and straighten the steering wheel.
-Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible after turning the steering wheel
so that the vehicle can be stopped as
soon as the two chimes sound.
-The chimes will not sound if the vehicle
does not arrive in a backing-up position
after the steering wheel has been maneu-
vered. If the vehicle is stopped and the
shift position is shifted to “R” before the
chimes sound, the screen shown in step 6
of “WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNC-
TION IS NOT IN USE” on page 335 is dis-
played.
6Shift to “R”.
-For operation after shifting to “R”:
See step 7 of “WHEN THE PRE-SUP-
PORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on
page 335.
335
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
1Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.
2Move your vehicle slowly to a position
perpendicular to the parking space,
and as close as possible to the parking
space.
3Move your vehicle to a position where
you can see the center of the parking
space right besides you.
If only a vehicle is parked on one side of
the parking space or two vehicles are
parked on both sides of the parking
space
Move your vehicle to a position from which
the exact center of the parking space can
be seen beside you before beginning to
turn the steering wheel.
-Positioning the vehicle perpendicular to
the parking space allows the angle of the
parking position to be identified easily.
-To facilitate the setting of the target park-
ing position, the front side sensors detect
the vehicles parked at the left and right of
the parking space and identify the target
parking position.
WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE
336
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
If no vehicle or small vehicles are parked
on both sides of the desired parking
space
Move your vehicle to a position from which
the exact center of the parking space can
be seen beside you, straighten the steer-
ing wheel and stop the vehicle.
-By stopping the vehicle here, you can
mostly identify the parking location, mak-
ing it easier to set the target parking posi-
tion.
-Make sure the steering wheel is straight
when you stop. If not, the parking location
cannot be identified.
-If you do not stop in front of the parking
space, the system will refer to the angle of
the vehicle relative to the target parking
space, and display the target parking posi-
tion (blue or red frame) in the position
used last time the parking assist mode
was activated.
4Position your vehicle so that you can
enter the parking space, then stop the
vehicle with the steering wheel
straight.
-To enter the target parking space more
accurately, position your vehicle with a
larger heading angle.
5Shift to “R”.
6Conduct the following operation.
If a parking position has been identified
by the easy set function
Confirm that the blue frame is aligned with
the space you wish to park in and touch
“OK”.
-After touching “OK”:
Go to step 8
-To change the parking position:
Touch then , then go to step
7
337
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
If a parking position hasn’t been identi-
fied using the easy set function
Turn the steering wheel toward the di-
rection in which you wish to park.
-If a target parking position can be identi-
fied, the screen will switch to the screen
shown in “If a parking position has been
identified by the easy set function”. (See
page 336.)
-If a parking position is not identified and
the screen does not change, touch
and then go to step 7.
●If the blue frame or a warning flag is over
a parked vehicle, or the target parking
position has been otherwise misrecog-
nized, touch to cancel and change
the parking position.
For the warning flag and blue frame,
see the CAUTION section of step 7.
338
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7Use the arrow to align the blue frame
with the desired parking space, then
touch “OK”.
-You can also move the blue frame by
touching the screen (area other than the
arrow).
-There are tricks to align the blue frame.
See “TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION” on page 340.
-If the orientation of the frame is opposite
to that of the target parking space:
Touch .
-Areas in which you are unable to park are
displayed in red.
-If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot
use the parking assist mode to park in that
location. See “WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST MODE” on
page 359.
-When the blue frame is displayed, if you
begin backing up without touching “OK”,
the message “Parking position has not
been set.” appears. If you continue to
back up, you will hear a warning tone and
the system will be disabled.
If the frame is red, there will be no guid-
ance even if you begin backing up.
-There may be times when, due to image
distortion, the blue frame does not match
the parking space lines on the road sur-
face. In this case, attempt an approximate
match in an area where the warning flag
does not overlap with any parked vehicles
or obstacles.
CAUTION
●The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure
to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back
up carefully.
●Always check that there are no obsta-
cles in the blue frame or between your
vehicle and the parking space, and that
the warning flag does not overlap any
parked vehicles or walls.
●If there are obstacles in the blue frame
or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag overlaps a
parked vehicle or wall, there is a danger
of collision. In this case, do not use the
parking assist mode.
●If the road surface has level variations or
a gradient between the starting position
and target parking position, it will not be
possible to correctly set the location,
which may cause the parking position to
be misaligned or crooked. In this case,
do not use the parking assist mode.
●If the red area which denotes an area
unsuitable for parking overlaps with the
lines of the parking space, you will be
unable to park, as the parking space is
judged as being an area unsuitable for
parking. Progress to a position where
the parking space lines do not overlap
with such an area.
339
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
8Position yourself as you would when
backing up normally, and rest your
hands on the steering wheel without
applying any pressure. Check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle
for safety, and slowly back up, using
the brake pedal to control the vehicle’s
speed.
-If you touch , assistance is canceled.
-If the vehicle’s backing up speed is too
fast, a warning tone will sound and the
message “! Vehicle is moving too fast.” will
be displayed. If you continue to back up at
that speed, the system will be disabled.
Back up at a speed that does not cause
the warning tone to sound.
-The blue frame displayed on the screen is
approximately the same size as your vehi-
cle. (The blue frame displayed when set-
ting the target parking position is the size
of a normal parking space.)
CAUTION
●When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, then disable
the system by touching on the
screen.
340
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
9Once the vehicle is mostly within the
target parking position, voice guidance
will give a message, and parking assist
mode will finish.
-For safety, voice guidance is given slightly
before the target parking position. Further-
more, at that point system control will fin-
ish, so grip the steering wheel firmly, and
finish parking in the desired position, using
the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
-Using the distance guide line as a refer-
ence, check in front and behind the vehi-
cle visually and check with the mirrors
while backing up.
The system decides the initial position-
ing of the blue frame by the position of
the parking space detected by the front
side sensors or the position of the vehi-
cle when it stops, and by detecting the
white lines of the parking space in the
camera image to identify the parking
space location.
The front side sensors identify the park-
ing space location and the white lines
near that location are detected.
The front side sensors cannot identify
the parking space location, or the park-
ing space location may be misaligned in
the following situations.
-A vehicle is parked at the back of the park-
ing space or the sensors cannot detect a
parked vehicle due to vehicle shape etc.
-The sensors cannot detect a pole or wall
beside the parking space.
-The sensors detect a pedestrian or object
near the parking space.
TIPS FOR SETTING THE
TARGET PARKING POSITION
Useful information for setting the target
parking position (blue frame)
THE DISPLAY POSITION OF
THE BLUE FRAME
341
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
If the point at which you stop is correctly
identified, the blue frame will display the
parking space accurately. If the white
lines of the parking space have not been
correctly identified, the blue frame will
not match the parking space even if you
stop in the correct location. In this case,
adjust the point at which you stop as
needed.
●If there are no vehicles parked on either
side of the target parking space when
your vehicle stops, the approximate
parking space location is identified, and
the white lines in that location are
detected. For this reason, stopping in
front of the parking space will make the
detection of target parking space’s white
lines easier.
●Successful detection of the parking
space’s white lines may not be possible,
depending on the shape of the line.
●In the following circumstances, detection
of the parking space lines on the road
surface may not be possible:
• The lines are faded or dirty, making
them unclear.
• The road surface is of a light color
which does not contrast well with the
white lines.
• The parking space lines are a color
other than white (yellow etc.).
• The area is dark, for example at night
or in a covered parking lot.
• During or after rain, when the road sur-
face is wet and reflects light, or pud-
dles have formed.
• The sun is shining directly on the cam-
era, for example early morning or late
afternoon.
• The parking space is covered with
snow or de-icing agent.
• There are markings or maintenance
marks on the road surface.
• The color or brightness of the road sur-
face is not uniform.
• Hot or cold water has splashed on the
camera, and the lens is fogged.
• There are dirt or water droplets on the
lens.
342
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
There are two ways to align the blue
frame with the parking space, either us-
ing the arrows on the screen, or by
touching the screen at points other than
the arrows.
■USING THE ARROWS ON THE
SCREEN
By touching the arrows displayed on the
screen, you can move the blue frame.
■DIRECTLY TOUCHING THE TAR-
GET POINT
By touching the point you wish to move
the frame to, you can move the blue
frame.
1Touch the front edge of the place you
wish to move.
2The frame will be moved as shown.
ALIGNING THE BLUE FRAME
INFORMATION
●If you touch the following areas, the blue
frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower screen button
on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range
of 31.2 ft. (9.5 m) or more behind, and/
or either left or right from the current
position.
343
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
If the lines of the parking space are wid-
er than the blue frame, position the
frame so that the difference between the
frame and the parking space lines is
equal on both sides.
IF THE PARKING SPACE AND
THE BLUE FRAME DO NOT
MATCH
344
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST MODE
-Guidance will not be given if the detected
space is narrow.
■PARKING BETWEEN TWO VEHI-
CLES
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST
MODE
Parallel parking assist mode assists
the driver with parallel parking by auto-
matically controlling the steering wheel
when backing up, in order to park in the
target position set on the screen.
This mode can be used when the as-
sist mode is ON.
PRE-SUPPORT FUNCTION
The pre-support function can be used
when there is a space between two
parked vehicles.
If a parking space is detected, this
function will inform the driver using a
tone when the vehicle is in a position to
begin backing up, and guides the vehi-
cle to a position from which assistance
can be given.
Press the pre-support switch once
Identify a parking space
Get into a position to begin back up
maneuvering
345
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
As the system only assists with parking
in a set target parking position, there are
times when the system will be unable to
render this assistance, depending on
factors such as road surface or vehicle
condition, or the distance to the set tar-
get parking position.
Use the system with full understanding
of the fact.
If a message is displayed while maneu-
vering, follow the procedures outlined in
“WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED” on page
355.
The illustrations here describe the pro-
cedure for pulling into a parking space
on the right. For pulling into a parking
space on the left, substitute left for right
and vice versa in all steps.
The operating method differs depending
on whether or not the pre-support func-
tion is in use.
●To allow the pre-support system to acti-
vate accurately, move the vehicle as
slowly as possible (at a speed that will
allow the vehicle to be stopped sud-
denly).
●If only one vehicle is parked, the pre-
support system cannot be used.
●The function cannot be used if the shift
position is in “P” or “R”, or if the vehicle
speed is faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).
●In order to identify parking spaces and
detect parked vehicles using the sen-
sors on both sides of the front bumper,
guidance cannot be given if a space is
not detected.
●Parking space guidance and searching
continues until the vehicle speed is
faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) or until the
function is turned off by pressing the
pre-support switch.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
CAUTION
●When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, then disable
the system by touching on the
screen.
346
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.
2With the vehicle speed at less than 9
mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle on the
near side of the parking space, press
the pre-support switch once. Confirm
that the display has switched to the
“Parallel Parking Mode” screen.
-The mode will switch with each press of
the pre-support switch.
-If the shift position is in “P” or if the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or above, two
beeps will sound when the pre-support
switch is pressed, and the display will not
change. (If the shift position is in “R”, the
display will not change.)
3Move the vehicle to a position parallel
to the road (or road shoulder) that is
also approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away
from the parked vehicle, and then pro-
ceed straight forward.
-To cancel the guidance function, turn off
the pre-support function by pressing the
pre-support switch twice.
WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS IN USE
Press the pre-support switch once
Sensor detection range
Approx. 3 ft. (1 m)
Desired parking location
347
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
4Stop the vehicle when two chimes
sound.
-Two chimes sound when the vehicle
reaches a position from which the front
edge of the leading parked vehicle can be
seen alongside.
-Move the vehicle forward as slowly as
possible so that the vehicle can be
stopped as soon as the two chimes
sound.
-The chimes will not sound if the vehicle
does not arrive in a backing-up position. If
the vehicle is stopped and the shift posi-
tion is shifted to “R” before the chimes
sound, the screen shown in step 5 of
“WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT FUNC-
TION IS NOT IN USE” on page 348 is dis-
played.
5Shift to “R”.
-For operation after shifting to “R”
See step 6 of “WHEN THE PRE-SUP-
PORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE” on
page 348.
348
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
1Check that the assist mode switch is
ON.
2Move your vehicle slowly to a position
parallel to the road or shoulder approx-
imately 3 ft. (1 m) away from parked
vehicles.
3Stop your vehicle in a position where
you can see the front edge of the lead-
ing parked vehicle right beside you,
with the steering wheel straight.
-To facilitate the setting of the target park-
ing position, the front side sensors detect
the vehicles parked in front of and behind
the parking space and identify the target
parking position.
-If there is no leading parked vehicle, the
system will display the target parking posi-
tion (blue or red frame) in the position
used last time the parallel parking assist
mode was activated.
WHEN THE PRE-SUPPORT
FUNCTION IS NOT IN USE
Approx. 3 ft. (1 m)
Desired parking location
349
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
4Shift to “R”.
5Touch on the screen.
6Use the arrow to align the blue frame
with your target parking space, and
touch “OK”.
-You can also move the blue frame by
touching the screen (area other than the
arrows).
-There are tricks to align the blue frame.
See “TIPS FOR SETTING THE TARGET
PARKING POSITION” on page 352.
-If the orientation of the frame is opposite
to that of the target parking space:
Touch .
-If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot
use the parallel parking assist mode to
park in that location. See “WHEN A RED
FRAME IS DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST
MODE” on page 359.
-When the blue frame is displayed, if you
begin backing up without touching “OK”,
the message “Parking position has not
been set.” appears. If you continue to
back up, you will hear a warning tone and
the system will be disabled.
If the frame is red, there will be no guid-
ance even if you begin backing up.
-There may be times when, due to image
distortion, the blue frame does not match
the parking space lines on the road sur-
face. In this case, use the warning flag
and blue extension guide line to set the
target parking position.
●Be sure to stop the vehicle parallel to the
road or shoulder. If the vehicle is not
parallel, the assist location will be very
near the shoulder.
If it looks like the vehicle will hit or mount
the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle, and touch on the
screen to deactivate the system.
350
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7Position yourself as you would when
backing up normally, and rest your
hands on the steering wheel without
applying any pressure. Check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle
for safety, and slowly back up, using
the brake pedal to control the vehicle’s
speed.
-If you touch , assistance is canceled.
-If the vehicle’s backing up speed is too
fast, a warning tone will sound and the
message “! Vehicle is moving too fast.” will
be displayed. If you continue to back up at
that speed, the system will be disabled.
Back up at a speed that does not cause
the warning tone to sound.
-The blue frame displayed on the screen is
approximately the same size as your vehi-
cle. (The blue frame displayed when set-
ting the target parking position is the size
of a normal parking space.)
CAUTION
●The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure
to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back
up carefully.
●Always check that there are no obsta-
cles in the blue frame or between your
vehicle and the parking space, and that
the warning flag and extension guide
line do not overlap any parked vehicles
or walls.
If there are obstacles in the blue frame
or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag or extension
guide line overlaps a parked vehicle or
wall, there is a danger of collision. In this
case, do not use the parallel parking
assist mode. The same applies if the
blue frame overlaps the shoulder.
●If the road surface has level variations or
a gradient between the starting position
and target parking position, it will not be
possible to correctly set the location,
which may cause the parking position to
be misaligned or crooked. In this case,
do not use the parallel parking assist
mode.
CAUTION
●When the shift position has been shifted
to R (as in step 4 of “WHEN THE PRE-
SUPPORT FUNCTION IS NOT IN
USE”), if the perpendicular parking
assist mode screen on page 335 has
been switched to via the easy set func-
tion, touch to cancel.
351
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
8Once the vehicle is mostly within the
target parking position, voice guidance
will give a message, and parallel park-
ing assist mode will finish.
-For safety, voice guidance is given slightly
before the target parking position. Further-
more, at that point system control will fin-
ish, so grip the steering wheel firmly, and
finish parking in the desired position, using
the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
-Using the distance guide line as a refer-
ence, check in front and behind the vehi-
cle visually and check with the mirrors
while backing up.
●When backing up, be sure to check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety, and back up slowly, depressing
the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If a collision seems likely, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle, then dis-
able the system by touching on the
screen.
352
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
There are two ways to align the blue
frame with the parking space, either us-
ing the arrows on the screen, or by
touching the screen at points other than
the arrows.
■USING THE ARROWS ON THE
SCREEN
By touching the arrows displayed on the
screen, you can move the blue frame.
-Adjusting the left-right alignment first will
make subsequent alignment easier.
TIPS FOR SETTING THE
TARGET PARKING POSITION
Useful information for setting the target
parking position (blue frame)
ALIGNING THE BLUE FRAME
353
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
■DIRECTLY TOUCHING THE TAR-
GET POINT
By touching the point you wish to move
the frame to, you can move the blue
frame.
1Touch the front edge of the place you
wish to move.
2The frame will be moved as shown.
The assisted parking position will move
left or right of the set target parking posi-
tion.
●If you touch the following areas, the blue
frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower screen button
on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range
of 34.4 ft. (10.5 m) or more behind the
current position, and/or 16.4 ft. (5.0 m)
or more either left or right from the cur-
rent position.
IF THERE IS A SLOPE IN THE
ROAD
354
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
In this case, if you align the warning flag
with the rear of the forward parked vehi-
cle, and the blue extension guide line
with the lower edge of the parked vehi-
cle’s rear wheel when setting the target
parking position, the left side of your ve-
hicle will be roughly in line with the left
side of the front parked vehicle once as-
sisted parking is complete. (If you are
parallel parking on the opposite side of
the road, left and right will be reversed.)
CAUTION
●If the parked vehicle is narrow, or parked
close to the shoulder, the assisted park-
ing position may be quite close to the
shoulder. If the vehicle seems likely to
hit or mount the shoulder, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and dis-
able the system by touching .
Narrow
355
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
5. WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
WHAT TO DO WHEN THIS SORT OF MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
Message Cause What to do
“! Check APGS. Have
your vehicle checked by
a dealer.”
There is a malfunction in the sys-
tem.
Have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
“! APGS can only be
used on a flat surface.”
The vehicle has rolled forward
on a sloped road.
The vehicle does not move
even if you take your foot off
the brake pedal.
Do not attempt to use the sys-
tem in those sorts of conditions.
“! APGS cannot assist
under the current condi-
tions.”
If the message is displayed only
when the system is operating, it
is likely that the tires are worn, or
tire inflation pressure is low.
Check tires for wear and pres-
sure.
If the message is displayed con-
stantly, there is most likely a mal-
function.
Turn the “POWER” switch to
OFF, then to ON mode. If the
message is still displayed, have
the vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer.
The vehicle has skidded or the
tires have been locked.
Do not attempt to use the sys-
tem on a slippery road such as
snowy road.
“! APGS is not available
now.”
The system has temporarily
overheated.
Turn the “POWER” switch to
OFF, then to ON mode. Wait a
few moments before use.
There is a malfunction in the
voice guidance system.
Have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
The hybrid system has not been
started.
Turn the “POWER” switch to
ON mode and start the hybrid
system. If the message is still
displayed, have the vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer.
“! Release the parking
brake.”
The parking brake has been ap-
plied.
Release the parking brake.
356
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
“! Too much force is be-
ing applied to the steer-
ing wheel.”
You are exerting too much pres-
sure on the steering wheel.
Loosen your grip on the steer-
ing wheel.
“Steering position is not
straight. Turn the steer-
ing wheel to left (or
right).”
The steering wheel is not
straight.
Straighten the steering wheel.
“! Parking position has
not been set.”
You have begun to back up with-
out touching “OK”.
Stop the vehicle and touch
“OK”.
“! Vehicle is moving too
fast.”
The speed at which you are
backing up is too fast.
Back up at a speed that does
not cause the warning chime to
sound, using the brake pedal.
The system will be disabled if
you back up too quickly.
“! APGS canceled by
user operation.”
You have turned the steering
wheel or depressed the acceler-
ator pedal during the assist
mode.
The system has been disabled,
so restart from the beginning.
“! Accelerator pedal has
been depressed.”
You have depressed the acceler-
ator pedal when setting the tar-
get parking position.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal.
“! Guidance is unavail-
able.”
Some sort of malfunction has oc-
curred within the system.
Have the vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
“! System not ready.” —Take your vehicle to your
Toyota dealer.
“! Clean the parking so-
nar sensors.”
In extreme cold weather or for-
eign matter gets on the sensors.
Have the vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
“APGS will start after
backing up slightly.”
The vehicle is too far away from
the parking space.
Reverse straight from this loca-
tion until two beeps sound.
Message Cause What to do
357
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
“A parking position could
not be identified.”
A potential parking space has not
been detected by the sensor.
Use the pre-support function in
an area with parking spaces.
“The space is not large
enough to use APGS.”
The sensor has detected a small
parking space, and parking by
APGS cannot be carried out.
Use the pre-support function in
an area with a larger parking
space.
“APGS is not available
from this position.”
The easy set function cannot be
used from this location.
Move to a location from which
parking can commence.
“! APGS has been can-
celled.”
The speed at which the vehicle is
moving forward is too fast.
Reduce the speed a little more
and use the pre-support func-
tion.
“The back door is open.
Do not use the backup
camera unless back
door is completely
closed.”
The back door is open. Close the back door complete-
ly.
Message Cause What to do
358
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
In the parallel parking assist mode and parking assist mode, voice guidance ac-
companies the following messages displayed during parking position setting
and steering wheel control. (Voice guidance may not be given depending on the
reason the message was displayed.)
For the adjustment of the volume, ask your Toyota dealer.
MESSAGE AND VOICE GUIDANCE
Message
Voice Guidance (Warning tone)
During setting During steering wheel control
“! Check APGS. Have
your vehicle checked by
a dealer.”
(One chime)
(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.
“! APGS cannot assist
under the current condi-
tions.”
—
(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.
“! APGS is not available
now.” (One chime) (Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.
“! Release the parking
brake.” (One chime) (Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.
“! Parking position has
not been set.” (One chime) —
“! Vehicle is moving too
fast.” —
(Several beeps and then two
beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.
“! APGS canceled by
user operation.” —(Two beeps) The guidance has
been canceled.
359
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
The frame may be displayed in red, de-
pending on the location and angle of the
vehicle when “R” is selected.
Furthermore, even if the frame is dis-
played in blue, if you move the frame to
a location unsuitable for parking using
the assist mode, the frame will change
to red.
WHEN A RED FRAME IS
DISPLAYED IN THE ASSIST
MODE
If the frame turns red and the message
“Adjust the frame to the target.” is dis-
played while setting the target parking
position, you cannot use the assist
mode.
In this situation, move the target park-
ing position, or move the position of the
vehicle.
360
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
6. MANUAL GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE
1Shift to “R”.
-If the system is in the assist mode on:
Touch on the screen.
-If the system is not in the estimated path
guide line display:
Touch or on the screen.
2While referring to the screen and mir-
rors, back into the parking space.
3Turn the steering wheel so that the es-
timated path guide lines are within the
parking space, and back up carefully.
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARKING (PERPENDICULAR
PARKING)
ESTIMATED PATH GUIDANCE
MODE
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the left. For pulling into a
parking space on the right, substitute
right for left and vice versa in all steps.
361
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
4When the vehicle is within the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so that
the vehicle width extension guide lines
and the clearance to the left and right
of the parking space are about the
same near the vehicle. Back up slowly.
5Turn the steering wheel so that the ve-
hicle width extension guide lines are
parallel with the parking space lines.
When the lines are parallel, straighten
the steering wheel and back up slowly.
-Even if the distance guide line and the
parking space rear edge appear to be par-
allel on the screen, in reality they may not
be parallel.
362
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
-When there is only one line dividing the
spaces in a parking lot, even if the vehicle
width extension guide lines and the park-
ing space right side (left side) appear to be
parallel on the screen, in reality they may
not be parallel.
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the left. For pulling into a park-
ing space on the right, substitute right for
left and vice versa in all steps.
1Shift to “R”.
-If the system is in the assist mode on:
Touch on the screen.
-If the system is not in the parking assist
guide line display:
Touch or on the screen.
2While referring to the screen and mir-
rors, back into the parking space.
INFORMATION
●The guide lines and buttons will not dis-
play if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.
PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE
363
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
3Back up until the parking assist guide-
lines meet the left edge of the parking
space. Stop the vehicle, turn the steer-
ing wheel all the way to the right, and
back up the vehicle to park.
-The point at which turn the steering wheel
depends on the width of the parking
space.
4When the vehicle is within the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so that
the vehicle width extension guide lines
and the clearance to the left and right
of the parking space are about the
same near the vehicle. Back up slowly.
364
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
5Turn the steering wheel so that the ve-
hicle width extension guide lines are
parallel with the parking space lines.
When the lines are parallel, straighten
the steering wheel and back up slowly.
-Even if the distance guide line and the
parking space rear edge appear to be par-
allel on the screen, in reality they may not
be parallel.
-When there is only one line dividing the
spaces in a parking lot, even if the vehicle
width extension guide lines and the park-
ing space right side (left side) appear to be
parallel on the screen, in reality they may
not be parallel.
INFORMATION
●The guide lines and buttons will not dis-
play if the back door is open. To display
them, close the back door completely.
365
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
1Shift to “R”.
2Back up until the parking assist guide
lines meet the edge of the desired
parking location. Turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and back
up slowly.
3When the vehicle is parallel with the
shoulder of the road, straighten the
steering wheel and back up slowly.
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SYSTEM WHEN
PARALLEL PARKING
The following example describes the
procedure for pulling into a parking
space on the right. For pulling into a
parking space on the left, substitute left
for right and vice versa in all steps.
Desired parking
location
NOTICE
●When backing up, do not forget to pay
attention to the front and back up slowly,
so as not to hit any vehicle parked in
front with the front corner of your vehi-
cle.
366
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
7. USAGE PRECAUTIONS
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
●Never depend on the advanced parking
guidance system entirely when backing
up. Always make sure your intended
path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
●Never back up while looking only at the
screen. The image on the screen is dif-
ferent from actual conditions. Depicted
distances between objects and flat sur-
faces will differ from actual distances. If
you back up while looking only at the
screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person
or an object. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehi-
cle visually and with mirrors before pro-
ceeding.
●Back up slowly, using the brake pedal to
control the vehicle’s speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles or people, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle, and then dis-
able the system by touching on the
screen.
●Use the system for flat spaces.
CAUTION
●As the steering wheel moves automati-
cally in the parallel parking assist mode
and parking assist mode, be aware of
the following points:
• Keep clothing such as neckties,
scarves and long sleeves away from
the steering wheel, as they may
become entangled. Also, keep children
away from the steering wheel.
• If you have long fingernails, be careful
not to injure yourself when the steering
wheel moves.
• If there is a problem, stop the vehicle
and disable the system by touching
on the screen.
●Be sure to check that the vehicle can
actually park in the target space before
beginning operation.
367
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
●Do not use the system in the following
conditions:
• Outside of parking areas
• In unprepared parking area such as
gravel or sand
• In parking areas that are crooked or
have level variations
• On slippery or icy roads, or in snow
• If the asphalt is melted due to harsh
sunlight
• If there are obstacles in the target
parking position (inside the blue
frame), or obstacles between the vehi-
cle and the parking space
• If there are a large number of vehicles
or pedestrians passing
• In areas unsuitable for parking (overly
small parking space, cliff etc.)
• If the image is hard to see due to dirt,
direct sunlight, shadow or snow on the
camera lens
• If you are using tire chains or emer-
gency tire(s)
●Do not use the system when the back
door is not completely closed.
CAUTION
●Do not use tires other than those
installed by the manufacturer, as the
system may not function correctly. Fur-
thermore, if you change the tires, there
may be errors in the positions of the
lines and frames displayed on the
screen. If you wish to change your tires,
see your Toyota dealer.
●In the following conditions, assisted
parking in the set parking position may
not be possible:
• The tires are extremely worn, or the
tire inflation pressure is low
• You are carrying an extremely heavy
load
• There is a load in one side of the vehi-
cle only, causing the vehicle to lean
• Tires have received a strong impact,
such as bumping against a curb,
resulting in improper wheel alignment
If there is a large difference between the
set parking space and the vehicle posi-
tion in any situations other than those
above, consult with your Toyota dealer.
●Use your own eyes to confirm the vehi-
cle’s surroundings, as the displayed
image may become faint or dark, and
moving images will be distorted, or not
entirely visible when the outside temper-
ature is low. When backing up, be sure
to check behind and all around the vehi-
cle visually and with mirror before pro-
ceeding.
368
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The image displayed on the screen is
an approximation only.
INFORMATION
●The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
●The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
●The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual dis-
tance.
Corners of bumper
INFORMATION
●In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the screen,
even when the system is functioning:
• In the dark (for example, at night)
• When the temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low
• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high
(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,
snow or mud) adheres to the camera
lens
• When the camera has scratches or dirt
on it
• When the sun or the beam of head-
lights is shining directly into the cam-
era lens
• If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera, the smear effect*,
peculiar to the CCD camera, may
occur.
*: Smear effect
A phenomenon that occurs when a
bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked
up by the camera; when transmitted by
the camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it.
369
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
●When the camera is used under fluores-
cent lights, sodium lights or mercury
lights etc., the lights and the illuminated
areas may appear to flicker.
●If you install the antenna of a wireless
device close to the camera, the screen
image may be affected by the electro-
magnetic waves, and the system may
not function correctly. Install an antenna
away from the camera.
●The method for adjusting the picture
quality of the advanced parking guid-
ance system is the same as that for the
navigation screen.
THE ADVANCED PARKING
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
CAMERA
The advanced parking guidance sys-
tem camera is located as shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
●If you do not observe the following pre-
cautions, the advanced parking guid-
ance system may not operate correctly,
possibly leading to an accident:
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the
position and mounting angle of the
camera may change. Be sure to have
the camera’s position and mounting
angle checked at your Toyota dealer.
• As the camera has a water proof con-
struction, do not detach, disassemble
or modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• If you scrape the camera cover, or
scrub it with a hard brush or an abra-
sive agent, you may scratch the cover,
leading to poor picture quality.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or paint coating to
adhere to the camera. If this happens,
wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly,
such as when hot water is poured on
the vehicle in cold weather, the system
may not operate normally.
• If the camera is subjected to a colli-
sion, or the camera orientation confir-
mation lines are not in line with the
bumper, it is likely that the camera
position or angle of installation has
become crooked. See your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the camera lens becomes dirty, it
cannot transmit a clear image.
If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere
to the lens, rinse with water and wipe
with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely
dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and
rinse.
370
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Objects appear to be farther away than
they actually are.
NOTICE
●When replacing the tires, please consult
any your Toyota dealer. If you replace
the tires, the position of the guide lines
displayed on the screen may change.
●Do not hit the camera or subject it to
strong impact as this may cause its posi-
tion and mounting angle to change.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply
intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in
the camera malfunctioning.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE DISPLAY AND THE
ACTUAL ROAD
In any of the following situations, there
is a margin of error between the set tar-
get parking position and guide lines on
the screen, and the actual distance/
course on the road.
WHEN THE GRADE BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
371
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Objects appear to be closer than they
actually are.
There is a margin of error between the
set target parking position and guide
lines on the screen, and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
WHEN THE GRADE BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS DUE TO THE
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS OR
THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE
LOAD
372
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
The estimated path guide lines are dis-
played according to flat surfaces (such as
the road). It is not possible to determine
the position of three-dimensional objects
(such as vehicles) using the estimated
path guide lines.
In the case shown above, the truck ap-
pears to be outside of the estimated
path guide lines and the vehicle does
not look as if it will hit the truck. Howev-
er, the width of the truck extends out
from the truck in a line, and this line may
actually be on the estimated path guide
lines.
In reality if you back up as guided by the
estimated path guide lines, the vehicle
may hit the truck.
Similarly, when the estimated path guide
lines pass near any object(s) or obsta-
cle(s), be sure to check the area behind
and around the vehicle visually.
WHEN A THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECT IS NEARBY
The guide on the screen targets a flat-
surfaced object (road etc).
When a three-dimensional object which
juts out (an obstacle such as a truck bed)
is nearby, observe the following precau-
tions, being careful not to collide with the
object.
ESTIMATED PATH GUIDANCE
MODE
The width
of the truck
373
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) and the actual distance differ as fol-
lows.
-The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) differs from the actual distance as
follows.
• In reality, = < ( and are
equally far away; is farther than
and ). However, on the screen, the sit-
uation appears to be < < .
• On the screen, it appears that a truck is
parked approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away.
However, in reality if you back up to point
, you will hit the truck.
DISTANCE GUIDE LINE
Approx.
3 ft. (1 m)
SENSOR
Parking spaces are detected by the
sensors on both ends of the front
bumper, thus making parking position
identification easier.
374
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
SENSOR DETECTION RANGE
WHEN IN PERPENDICULAR
PARKING ASSIST MODE
SENSOR DETECTION RANGE
WHEN IN PARALLEL PARKING
ASSIST MODE
CAUTION
●A sensor may not operate properly in the
following situations:
• There is ice, snow or mud on the sen-
sor. (When it is removed, the normal
operation will return.)
• The sensor is frozen. (When the sen-
sor warms up, it will return to normal.)
At low temperatures in particular, sen-
sors that are frozen may not detect a
parked vehicle.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• When the vehicle is tilted.
• In extreme hot or cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy roads, slopes,
gravelled roads or grass.
• Devices issuing ultrasonic waves are
operated around your vehicle, such as
a horn from another vehicle, motorcy-
cle engine, air braking sound from
heavy-duty vehicles.
• When rain or water is splashed over
the vehicle.
• When a radio antenna or fender pole is
mounted on your vehicle.
• The sensor approaches too close to a
parked vehicle.
• The bumper or sensor receives a
strong impact.
●Do not attach any accessories within the
detection range of the sensors.
375
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
When the vehicle is stopped, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the left,
then all the way to the right. (It does not
matter in which direction-right or left-you
turn first.)
When the screen returns to the original
display, correction is complete.
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
Make sure to initialize the system in the
following situations.
-The 12-volt battery is disconnected and
reconnected.
-The system initialization in progress
screen is displayed when the shift posi-
tion is moved to the “R” (due to low bat-
tery etc.).
HOW TO CORRECT
●If the above screen remains, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
INFORMATION
●The help screen appears when is
touched. Make a correction using the
following method in accordance with the
display.
When the screen returns to the original
display, correction is complete.
If the above screen remains, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
376
2. ADVANCED PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
INDEX
378
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
A
Adding destinations................................... 85
Address book .......................................... 101
Address book entries ..............................101
Advanced parking guidance system .......322
Advanced parking guidance
system camera ................................369
Area displayed on screen.................... 368
Differences between the display
and the actual road ..........................370
Driving precautions..............................366
Easy set function .................................331
Example of how to use the system
when parallel parking.......................365
Example of how to use the system
when parking (Perpendicular
parking)............................................360
If a message appears
on the screen...................................310
Initializing the system ..........................375
Introduction.......................................... 322
Maneuvering when parking .................324
Manual guide line display mode..........360
Operating procedure ...................333, 345
Parallel parking assist mode ...............344
Parking assist mode
(Perpendicular parking) ...................330
Pre-support function .................... 330, 344
Pre-support switch...............................323
Sensor .................................................373
Tips for setting the
target parking position ............. 340, 352
Usage precautions .............................. 366
What to do when this sort of
message is displayed ...................... 355
When a red frame is displayed
in the assist mode............................359
When a three-dimensional object
is nearby .......................................... 372
AM...........................................................199
Apps........................................................ 304
Audio .......................................................190
Audio language code ..............................227
Audio settings..........................................264
HD Radio™ system settings................264
iPod settings ........................................265
Audio/video remote controls
(Steering switches) ..............................252
Audio/video system.................................190
Audio/video system operating hints ........254
Caring for your DVD player
and disc............................................256
CD-R and CD-RW discs ......................260
iPod .....................................................255
MP3/WMA files ....................................258
Radio reception ...................................254
Terms ..................................................260
USB memory .......................................256
Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ...........195
AUX port..................................................198
B
Basic function............................................26
Bluetooth®...............................................130
Bluetooth® audio .....................................242
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio
player ...............................................245
Playing Bluetooth® audio.....................247
Bluetooth® phone....................................137
Bluetooth® phone message function.......152
Checking messages ............................152
New message notification....................154
Replying (Quick reply) .........................153
Bluetooth® settings .................................177
Detailed Bluetooth® settings................184
Registered devices ..............................177
Selecting a Bluetooth® phone .............181
Selecting portable player .....................183
Brightness .........................................31, 224
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
379
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
C
Call on the Bluetooth® phone ................. 141
By call history...................................... 143
By dial ................................................. 141
By phonebook ..................................... 141
By POI call .......................................... 147
By speed dial....................................... 143
By voice recognition ............................ 145
Calling using an SMS/MMS
message .......................................... 147
CD........................................................... 213
CLOSE button......................................... 190
Color ................................................. 47, 224
Command list.......................................... 277
Contrast ............................................ 31, 224
Current position calibration ..................... 117
Current position display ............................ 33
D
Deleting destinations ................................ 86
Deleting personal data.............................. 51
Deleting previous destinations................ 110
Deleting set destinations........................... 72
DEST button ............................................. 10
“Destination” screen.................................. 20
Destination search .................................... 56
By “Address” ......................................... 58
By “Address Book” ................................ 68
By “Coordinates” ................................... 72
By “Emergency” .................................... 68
By home ................................................ 57
By “Intersection & Freeway”.................. 69
By “Map”................................................ 71
By “Point of Interest” ............................. 61
By preset destinations........................... 57
By “Previous Destinations”.................... 67
Selecting the search area ..................... 56
Detailed navigation settings.................... 112
Detour setting ........................................... 87
Dial..................................................141, 145
Distance and time to destination............... 84
DSP control.............................................195
DVD ........................................................213
DVD player..............................................213
DVD options ........................................ 222
DVD player and DVD video disc
information ....................................... 231
Ejecting a disc .....................................213
If the player malfunctions .................... 230
Inserting a disc .................................... 213
Operating a DVD disc..........................219
Playing a disc ...................................... 214
Playing a DVD disc..............................220
Playing an audio disc ..........................214
Playing an MP3/WMA disc .................. 216
E
Emergency................................................ 68
Entune.....................................................304
Expanded voice commands....................276
F
FM...........................................................199
Fuel consumption.................................... 282
Function index...........................................18
G
General settings........................................43
GPS (Global Positioning System) .....10, 126
H
HD Radio™.............................................202
Heading-up screen....................................41
Home ......................................12, 17, 57, 97
380
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
I
INFO/APPS (INFO) button........................ 10
Information .............................................. 282
“Information” screen.................................. 24
Inputting letters and numbers ................... 28
Internet radio broadcast ..........................212
iPod.........................................................238
Connecting iPod..................................238
Playing iPod ........................................238
K
Keyboard layout ........................................47
L
Language..................................................46
Limitations of the navigation system.......126
List screen operation.................................28
M
MAP .......................................................... 71
Map database information
and updates.........................................384
Map database version and
coverage area ..................................... 283
Map icons.................................................. 42
Map scale.................................................. 41
MAP/VOICE button ...................................10
MEDIA button.......................................... 190
MP3.........................................................216
N
Natural speech information.....................274
Navigation system..................................... 56
North-up screen ........................................ 41
O
Operation flow: Guiding the route .............16
Orientation of the map...............................41
Overview button and guidance screen......10
P
Pausing guidance......................................91
Peripheral monitoring system..................318
Phone......................................................130
Phone (Hands-free system for
cellular phone) .....................................132
About the phonebook in this system....134
Using the phone switch .......................133
Using the steering switches.................134
When selling or disposing of
the vehicle........................................135
PHONE button ........................................130
Phone settings ........................................155
Message settings.................................170
Phone display settings.........................174
Phone sound settings..........................155
Phonebook ..........................................157
Phonebook......................................141, 157
POI call....................................................147
POI icons...................................................92
Point of Interest .........................................61
Preset destinations..............................14, 57
Previous destinations................................67
PWR VOL knob.......................................190
Q
Quick guide ...............................................10
Quick reference.........................20, 130, 190
381
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
R
Radio ...................................................... 199
Listening to the radio........................... 199
Presetting a station ............................. 199
Radio broadcast data system.............. 200
Selecting a station............................... 200
Traffic announcement ......................... 201
Radio broadcast data system ................. 200
RADIO button ......................................... 190
Rear view monitor system ...................... 318
Area displayed on screen.................... 320
Rear view monitor system camera...... 320
Receive on the Bluetooth® phone .......... 148
Register a Bluetooth® phone .................. 137
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone.......... 138
Reconnecting the Bluetooth®
phone............................................... 140
Registering home...................................... 12
Registering preset destinations ................ 14
Reordering destinations............................ 85
Resuming guidance .................................. 91
Route guidance......................................... 74
Route guidance screen............................. 78
Route overview ......................................... 88
Route preference ...................................... 89
Route trace ............................................... 95
S
Satellite radio (SAT)................................194
Screen adjustment .................................... 31
Screen Off.................................................31
Screen scroll operation .............................33
Screen settings adjustment....................... 31
Screens for navigation settings.................96
SEEK/TRACK button .............................. 190
Setting home as the destination................ 17
Setting up the “Address Book” ................ 101
Setting up the “Areas to Avoid” ............... 106
Setting up the “Home”...............................97
Setting up the “Preset Destinations” .........99
SETUP button ...........................10, 130, 190
“Setup” screen .......................................... 22
Show on map ............................................92
SMS/MMS message .......................147, 152
Speed dial ............................................... 143
Standard map icons..................................42
Starting route guidance.............................74
Steering switches....................134, 252, 268
Surround .................................................195
Switching the screens...............................38
382
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
T
Talk on the Bluetooth® phone.................149
Incoming call waiting ...........................151
Time zone .................................................45
Tire change calibration............................117
Tone........................................................ 224
Tone and balance ...................................195
Touch screen operation ............................27
Traffic incidents.......................................298
TUNE SCROLL knob ..............................190
Typical voice guidance prompts................ 81
U
USB memory........................................... 233
Connecting a USB memory.................233
Playing a USB memory ....................... 234
USB port .................................................198
V
Vehicle settings.......................................120
Maintenance........................................120
Vehicle customization..........................125
Voice command system.................. 193, 268
Steering switches for the
voice command system ...................268
Voice recognition ....................................145
Voice settings............................................ 52
Voice volume ............................................ 53
W
WMA .......................................216, 258, 260
X
XM Fuel Prices........................................292
Show XM Fuel Prices information .......292
View detailed fuel price information.....292
XM Fuel Prices settings.......................293
XM NavTraffic®.......................................298
Show traffic event ................................298
Show XM Navtraffic® information ........299
XM NavWeather™ ..................................295
Show XM NavWeather™
information .......................................295
Weather information ............................296
Weather warnings................................297
XM NavWeather™ indicator ................297
XM Satellite Radio broadcast..................206
Channel category ................................208
Displaying the radio ID ........................207
Displaying the title and name ..............209
How to subscribe to an
XM Satellite Radio ...........................206
If the satellite radio tuner
malfunctions.....................................210
Listening to satellite radio ....................207
Presetting a channel............................208
Selecting a channel .............................208
XM Sports ...............................................286
Receive sports information ..................286
XM Sports settings ..............................287
XM Stocks ...............................................289
Receive stock data ..............................289
XM Stocks settings ..............................290
Z
Zoom in button ..........................................10
Zoom out button ........................................10
383
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
384
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Map database information and updates
This system uses the maps of DENSO.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR YOUR COPY OF THE SPATIAL
MAP DATABASE, INCLUDING
LOCATION CODES AND RELATED
PRODUCTS (COLLECTIVELY, THE
“DATABASE”), USED IN THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM. BY USING
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM AND
THE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPT
AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET
FORTH BELOW.
LICENSE GRANT
DENSO CORPORATION (“DENSO”),
as a licensed distributor of the
DATABASE, grants to you a
non-exclusive, non-perpetual license
to use your copy of the DATABASE for
your personal use or for your use in
your business’ internal operations and
not for any other purpose. This license
does not include the right to grant
sub-licenses.
OWNERSHIP
The DATABASE and the copyrights
and intellectual property and
neighboring rights therein are owned
by TomTom North America, Inc.
(“TomTom”) and its licensors. This
Agreement does not transfer any title
or interest in the DATABASE, except
for the license to use the DATABASE
according and subject to the terms
and conditions of this Agreement. You
shall not alter, obscure or remove any
copyright notices, trademark notices
or other restrictive legends relating to
the DATABASE.
The DATABASE comprises
confidential and proprietary
information and materials of TomTom.
Accordingly, you shall hold the
DATABASE in confidence and trust.
You shall take reasonable steps to
protect the DATABASE from
misappropriation or misuse. You shall
not extract stand-alone data from or
publish any part of the DATABASE
without the prior written consent of
TomTom and its licensors.
385
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
LIMITATIONS ON USE
The DATABASE is restricted for use in
the specific system for which it was
created. Except to the extent explicitly
permitted by mandatory laws, you may
not extract or reutilize any portion of
the contents of the DATABASE, nor
reproduce, copy, duplicate, modify,
adapt, translate, disassemble,
decompile, or reverse engineer any
portion of the DATABASE.
TRANSFER
You many not transfer the DATABASE
to third parties, except together with
the system for which it was created,
provided that you do not retain any
copy of the DATABASE, and provided
that the transferee agrees to all terms
and conditions of this AGREEMENT.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
THE LICENSED PRODUCTS ARE
PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND
“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND
TOMTOM AND ITS SUPPLIERS
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR
INFORMATION PROVIDED BY
TOMTOM OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS,
EMPLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY
PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY, AND LICENSEE IS
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY
SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL
CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT.
386
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
NEITHER TOMTOM NOR ITS
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO
THE UNDERSIGNED FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR
COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR
THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER THE PARTY WAS
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING
TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED
HEREIN, TOMTOM SHALL HAVE NO
MONETARY LIABILITY TO THE
UNDERSIGNED FOR ANY CAUSE
(REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO
THIS AGREEMENT.
WARNINGS
The DATABASE comprises facts and
information from government and other
sources reflecting circumstances in
existence before you received the
DATABASE, which may contain errors
and omissions. Accordingly, the
DATABASE may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing
circumstances, and due to the nature of
the sources used. The DATABASE
does not include or reflect information
relating to, among other things,
neighborhood safety; law enforcement;
emergency assistance; construction
work; road or lane closures; vehicle or
speed restrictions; road slope or grade;
bridge height, weight or other limits;
road or traffic conditions; special
events; traffic congestion; or travel
time.
End Users shall acknowledge that the
use of the Licensed Products with a
non-TomTom map may result in
increased variance between the
location displayed on the map and
ground truth location.
The covenants and obligations
undertaken by the End User herein are
intended for the direct benefit of
TomTom and may be enforced by
TomTom directly against the End User.
387
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. If End
User is an agency, department, or
other entity of the United States
Government, or funded in whole or in
part by the United States Government,
then use, duplication, reproduction,
release, modification, disclosure or
transfer of this commercial product and
accompanying documentation, is
restricted in accordance with the
LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as
described in any applicable DFARS or
FAR. In case of conflict between any of
the FAR and/or DFARS that may apply
to the Licensed Product, the
construction that provides greater
limitations on the Government’s rights
shall control. Contractor/manufacturer
is TomTom North America, Inc., 11
Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The
Licensed Products are c 2006-Present
by TomTom. ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED. For purpose of any public
disclosure provision under any federal,
state or local law, it is agreed that the
Licensed Products are a trade secret
and a proprietary commercial product
and not subject to disclosure.
If End User is an agency, department,
or other entity of any State government,
the United States Government or any
other public entity or funded in whole or
in part by the United States
Government, then End User hereby
agrees to protect the Licensed
Products from public disclosure and to
consider the Licensed Products
exempt from any statute, law,
regulation, or code, including any
Sunshine Act, Public Records Act,
Freedom of Information Act, or
equivalent, which permits public
access and/or reproduction or use of
the Licensed Products. In the event
that such exemption is challenged
under any such laws, this EULA shall
be considered breached and any and
all right to retain any copies or to use of
the Licensed Products shall be
terminated and considered
immediately null and void. Any copies
of the Licensed Products held by
Licensee shall immediately be
destroyed.
388
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
If any court of competent jurisdiction
considers this clause void and
unenforceable, in whole or in part, for
any reason, this EULA shall be
considered terminated and null and
void, in its entirety, and any and all
copies of the Licensed Products shall
immediately be destroyed.
END-USER TERMS
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and
is subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you,
on the one hand, and DENSO
CORPORATION (“DENSO”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2011* NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
* original publication date
NAVTEQ holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2011*.
Prices are not established, controlled
or approved by the United States
Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
*original publication date
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Personal Use Only. You agree to use
this Data together with vehicle
navigation system for the solely
personal, non-commercial purposes for
which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you may copy
this Data only as necessary for your
personal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save
it, provided that you do not remove any
copyright notices that appear and do
not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble
or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute
it in any form, for any purpose, except
to the extent permitted by mandatory
laws. Multi-disc sets may only be
transferred or sold as a complete set as
provided by DENSO and not as a
subset thereof.
389
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Restrictions. Except where you have
been specifically licensed to do so by
DENSO, and without limiting the
preceding paragraph, you may not (a)
use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable
of vehicle navigation, positioning,
dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or
(b) with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or
computer devices, including without
limitation cellular phones, palmtop and
handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information
due to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may
lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to
you “as is,” and you agree to use it at
your own risk. DENSO and its licensors
(and their licensors and suppliers)
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties of any kind, express or
implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, content,
quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: DENSO AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not
apply to you.
390
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF
THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS
OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS
INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT
OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF DENSO OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE
BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries
do not allow certain liability exclusions
or damages limitations, so to that
extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You agree not to export
from anywhere any part of the Data
provided to you or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire
agreement between DENSO (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the
subject matter hereof, and supersedes
in their entirety any and all written or
oral agreements previously existing
between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the
laws of the State of Illinois, without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the jurisdiction of the State of
Illinois for any and all disputes, claims
and actions arising from or in
connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
391
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar
to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is
a “commercial item” as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these
End-User Terms, and each copy of
Data delivered or otherwise furnished
shall be marked and embedded as
appropriate with the following “Notice of
Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend
provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or
any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or
alternative rights in the Data.
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which
this data was provided.
© 2011* NAVTEQ - All rights
reserved. *original publication date
END USER NOTICE
PLEASE READ THIS NOTICE
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Point Of Interest Data (“POI” Data)
in the navigation system is in part
provided by Infogroup Inc.
(“Infogroup”). By using the POI Data,
you accept and agree to all terms and
conditions set forth below.
1. Ownership
All rights, title and interest to the
Infogroup POI Data shall be retained by
Infogroup.
2. Limitations on use
Except to the extent explicitly permitted
by mandatory laws, you may not
extract or reutilize any portion of the
contents of the POI Data, nor
reproduce, copy, modify, adapt,
translate, disassemble, decompile, or
reverse engineer any portion of the POI
Data.
3. Transfer
You may not transfer the POI Data to
third parties, except together with the
system for which it was created,
provided that you do not retain any
copy of the POI Data.
392
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. Disclaimer of warranty
EXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN,
INFOGROUP MAKES NO EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY.
5. Limitation of Liability
EITHER INFOGROUP OR SUPPLIER
OF POI DATA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES MADE OR ALLEGED IN
CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF
THE POI DATA.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Personal Use Only. You agree to use
this information for solely personal,
non-commercial purposes, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. You may not modify
the information or remove any
copyright notices that appear on the
information in any way. You may not
decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this
information, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any
purpose. Without limiting the foregoing,
you may not use this information with
any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or
in communication with vehicles,
capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications.
393
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
No Warranty. This information is
provided to you “as is,” and you agree
to use it at your own risk. DENSO and
its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers, collectively “DENSO”) make
no guarantees, representations or
warranties of any kind, express or
implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, and
DENSO expressly disclaims any
warranties regarding content, quality,
accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, non-infringement,
usefulness, use or results to be
obtained from this information, or that
the information or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free. Some
states, territories and countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to
that extent, the above exclusion may
not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF ITS NATURE,
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY LOSS OF PROFIT,
REVENUE OR CONTRACTS
ARISING OUT OF YOUR
POSSESSION, USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS
INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT
OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF DENSO OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE
BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some states, territories and countries
do not allow certain liability exclusions
or damages limitations, so to that
extent the above may not apply to you.
394
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Indemnity. You agree to indemnify,
defend and hold DENSO and its
licensors (including their respective
licensors, suppliers, assignees,
subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and
the respective officers, directors,
employees, shareholders, agents and
representatives of each of them) free
and harmless from and against any
liability, loss, injury (including injuries
resulting in death), demand, action,
cost, expense, or claim of any kind or
character, including but not limited to
attorney’s fees, arising out of or in
connection with any use or possession
by you of this information.
END USER NOTICE
The marks of companies displayed by
this product to indicate business
locations are the marks of their
respective owners. The use of such
marks in this product does not imply
any sponsorship, approval, or
endorsement by such companies of
this product.
End User’s use of the Brand Icon
Licensed Product and any portion
thereof, is limited to use solely for the
purpose of enhancing the value and/or
use of the spatial vector data furnished
or made by TomTom. Notwithstanding
anything to the contrary herein, or in
any attachment or exhibit hereto, in no
event shall End User use the Brand
Icon Licensed Product or any portion
thereof in connection with or in
conjunction with spatial street vector
data furnished or made by a party other
than TomTom. End User may only use
the icons, brand names, logos,
trademarks or other features within
(and not separate from) the map data in
any collateral, marketing and product
packaging. In addition, End shall not
modify or alter the color, shape, size,
and orientation of the Brand Icon
Licensed Product as provided to End
User without TomTom’s prior written
approval.
Licensee agrees that the use of Brand
Icon Licensed Product subject to the
terms and conditions set forth in this
Agreement and that there may be
additional third party terms, conditions
and restrictions to which the use of the
Brand Icon Licensed Product will be
subject provided to the End User from
time to time by TomTom in the Release
Notes applicable to the Licensed
Products.
395
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
This product uses the following open
source software.
· T-Kernel
This Product uses the Source Code of
T-Kernel under T-License granted by
the T-Engine Forum
(www.t-engine.org).
· C Library
This product includes software
developed by the University of
California, Berkeley and its
contributors. This product includes
software developed by the University
of California, Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory.
Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993
The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993,
1994 The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988 Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988 University of Utah.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from
software contributed to Berkeley by
the Systems Programming Group of
the University of Utah Computer
Science Department and Ralph
Campbell.
Open source license
396
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from
software contributed to Berkeley by
Arthur David Olson of the National
Cancer Institute.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to Berkeley by Chris
Torek.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to Berkeley by Berkeley
Software Design, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to Berkeley by Ralph
Campbell.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All
or some portions of this file are derived
from material licensed to the
University of California by American
Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are
reproduced herein with the permission
of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
397
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
This software was developed by the
Computer Systems Engineering group
at Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
under DARPA contract BG 91-66 and
contributed to Berkeley. All advertising
materials mentioning features or use of
this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Lawrence
Berkeley Laboratory.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to Berkeley by Ralph
Campbell. This file is derived from the
MIPS RISC Architecture book by Gerry
Kane.
Copyright © 1993 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to Berkeley by Andrew
Hume of AT&T Bell Laboratories.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and
its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University
nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software
without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
398
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and
its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University
nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software
without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital
Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software for any purpose
with or without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies, and that the name
of Digital Equipment Corporation not
be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific,
written prior permission.
399
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS
IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT
CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993
The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distri-
bution.
3. Neither the name of the University
nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software
without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
400
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
This product includes software
developed by the NetBSD Foundation,
Inc. and its contributors.
Copyright © 1996 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by J.T. Conklin.
Copyright © 1997 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by J.T. Conklin.
Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code was contributed to The
NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 1998, 2000 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Klaus J. Klein.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Julian Coleman.
Copyright © 2000 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Dieter Baron and Thomas Klausner.
Copyright © 2000, 2001 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and by
Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 2001 The NetBSD
Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software
contributed to The NetBSD Foundation
by Klaus Klein.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its
contributors.
401
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD
Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product includes software
developed by Christos Zoulas.
Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by
Christos Zoulas.
4. The name of the author may not be
used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
402
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software
developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by
Winning Strategies, Inc.
4. The name of the author may not be
used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
403
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and
1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor
the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE PROJECT AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Copyright ©1999 Citrus Project, All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
404
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-Mellon
University. All rights reserved. Author:
Chris G. Demetriou
Copyright © 1995, 1996 Carnegie-
Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Author: Chris G. Demetriou
Permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its
documentation is hereby granted,
provided that both the copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in all
copies of the software, derivative works
or modified versions, and any portions
thereof, and that both notices appear in
supporting documentation.
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS
““AS IS”” CONDITION. CARNEGIE
MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY
OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this
software to return to Software
Distribution Coordinator or
Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU
School of Computer Science Carnegie
Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-
3890 any improvements or extensions
that they make and grant Carnegie the
rights to redistribute these changes.
· TCP/IP, Socket Library
This product includes software
developed by the University of
California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993
The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
405
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Copyright © 1985, 1993 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 The
Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and
its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University
nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software
without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Copyright © 2004 by Internet Systems
Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””) Portions
Copyright © 1996-1999 by Internet
Software Consortium. Permission to
use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided
that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
406
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS
IS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital
Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software for any purpose
with or without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies, and that the name
of Digital Equipment Corporation not
be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific,
written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS
IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT
CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
This product includes software
developed by WIDE Project and its
contributors.
Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996,
1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
407
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by WIDE
Project and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the project nor
the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE PROJECT AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the
University of California. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following dis-
claimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distri-
bution.
3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]
4. Neither the name of the University
nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote prod-
ucts derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
408
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988 Regents
of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms are permitted provided
that the above copyright notice and this
paragraph are duplicated in all such
forms and that any documentation and
other materials related to such
distribution and use acknowledge that
the software was developed by the
University of California, Berkeley. The
name of the University may not be used
to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS
IS”” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Rights, responsibilities and use of this
software are controlled by the
agreement found in the ““LICENSE.H””
file distributed with this source code.
““LICENSE.H”” may not be removed
from this distribution, modified,
enhanced nor references to it omitted.
Copyright 1983 by the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984 by the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984, 1985 by the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPort
Software.
Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPort
Software.
Copyright 1990-1996 by NetPort
Software.
409
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPort
Software.
Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1986 by Carnegie Mellon
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided
that the above copyright notice appear
in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation,
and that the name of CMU not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without
specific, written prior permission.
· OpenSSL
This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/) This product
includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written
by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2008 The OpenSSL
Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and
“OpenSSL Project” must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission,
please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software
may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“OpenSSL” appear in their names
without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form
whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment: “This product
includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
410
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product
includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights
reserved.
This package is an SSL
implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The
implementation was written so as to
conform with Netscapes SSL. This
library is free for commercial and non-
commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not
just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same
copyright terms except that the holder
is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and
as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this
package is used in a product, Eric
Young should be given attribution as
the author of the parts of the library
used. This can be in the form of a
textual message at program startup or
in documentation (online or textual)
provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
411
PRIUS_v_Navi_OM47828U_(U)
12.08.22 16:15
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement: “This product
includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out
if the rouines from the library being
used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific
code (or a derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you
must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written
by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
ERIC YOUNG ’’AS IS’’ AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for
any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another
distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.

Navigation menu